UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
 AT LOS ANGELES
 
 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 AND ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 4 4 7 3 9
 
 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 AND ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 By 
 HARRY EATON STEWART, M.D. 
 
 CAPTAIN MEDICAL CORPS, U.S. ARMY, DIVISION OF ORTHOPEDICS ; ASSISTANT DIREC- 
 TOR, SECTION OF PHYSIOTHERAPY, SURGEON GENERAl'sOFFICE; INSTRUCTOR 
 IN MEDICAL AND ORTHOPEDIC GYMNASTICS AND MASSAGE, NEW HAVEN 
 NORMAL SCHOOL OF gymnastics; ATTENDING SURGEON, NEW HAVEN 
 ORTHOPEDIC dispensary; FORMERLY INSTRUCTOR IN CORRECTIVE 
 GYMNASTICS, TEACHERS COLLEGE, COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY. 
 
 Authorized for Publication by the 
 Surgeon General of the U. S. Army 
 
 67 ORIGINAL ILLUSTRATIONS 
 AND 2 DIAGRAMS ^ 
 
 M 
 
 
 1 
 
 Ini 
 
 
 i 
 
 1^ 
 
 lOEHK 
 
 1 
 
 
 NEW YORK 
 
 PAUL B. HOEBER 
 
 1920 
 
 3^7'>f
 
 Copyright, 1920, 
 Bt PAUL B. HOEBER 
 
 Published Janvary, 19S0 
 
 '*<*<* <. '*ti*i 
 
 Printed in the United States of Ameriea
 
 7CS' 
 
 PKEFACE 
 
 Physical reconstruction is the watchword of the hour 
 and yet the picture brought to mind by this phrase is but 
 a small part of a greater problem, the physical recon- 
 struction of the race. That there is need for such recon- 
 struction among us is evident from any study of the re- 
 jection from service for physical disability which the 
 draft examinations brought forth. We have become a 
 city-dwelling nation, and are subject to the innumerable 
 deleterious influences which follow in the wake of city life 
 and intense industrial competition. The meager begin- 
 nings of playground and physical education appropria- 
 tions and infant welfare movements have as yet in no 
 way compensated the child for his rapid loss of outdoor 
 life and freedom. The physician must be deeply con- 
 cerned with every effort to improve child hygiene. He 
 is specifically concerned with the problem of prevention 
 and cure of remedial physical defects. In this book con- 
 crete directions are given regarding -spinal curvature, 
 congenital defects, rickets and other orthopedic condi- 
 tions. The question of competitive athletics and its rela- 
 tion to health in youth of both boys and girls is considered 
 and certain definite rules for safeguards are laid down. 
 
 In the reconstruction of the wounded soldier, in which 
 we and our allies are now engaged, much that is new and 
 of great value has been learned. The new orthopedic
 
 vi PREFACE 
 
 principles, appliances, and methods of treatment which 
 have been evolved have been thoroughly tried out under 
 exceptional conditions as regards amount of material, 
 length of observation, and unlimited resources. 
 
 The application of the successful methods evolved in 
 the treatment of war injuries to the treatment of indus- 
 trial accidents is of the utmost importance to the general 
 surgeon. Physiotherapy and vocational therapy have, 
 by proper application and coordination, achieved such 
 wonderful results that it is inconceivable that they can 
 have other than a very prominent place in the general 
 hospital in the future. Every physician and surgeon 
 should be familiar with the indications for the various 
 types of treatment, and their effects on the local and 
 general condition of the patient, his morale, and his re- 
 turn to his former or new occupation. When one consid- 
 ers that the number of our wounded was approximately 
 two hundred thousand, the importance of the viewpoint 
 just mentioned is seen when we remember that we have in 
 this country about seven hundred thousand industrial 
 accidents yearly. 
 
 The author's experience in teaching and supervisin.g 
 reconstruction aides in physiotherapy has convinced him 
 that a condensed manual, giving the directions for the 
 various types of treatment as well as the theoretical con- 
 siderations, would be of great assistance to them in the 
 work in which they are now engaged. Since vocational 
 reconstruction is being so largely applied for definite 
 therapeutic indications, it is of the greatest importance 
 that the workers in this corps understand the viewpoint
 
 PREFACE vii 
 
 and treatment given in physiotherapy, which leads up to 
 their work. The theory and treatment of congenital and 
 functional defects other than those following war injuries 
 should be useful to aides who plan to continue the same 
 type of work in civil life. 
 
 In the teaching of normal-school students of physical 
 education it has also been evident that they need, for 
 their work in orthopedic and medical gynmastics, definite 
 exercise programs for such conditions as faulty posture, 
 spinal curvature, infantile paralysis, flat foot, etc. 
 
 It has been the author's object to present in condensed 
 form the main principles of orthopedics in the treatment 
 of the defects of childhood, war injuries, and industrial 
 accidents, laying stress upon the treatment by massage, 
 exercise, and other types of physiotherapy. It should, 
 therefore, be of value to the physician, reconstruction 
 aide, physical director, and orthopedic assistant, not only 
 in their better understanding of the work, but in empha- 
 sizing the vital importance of this so long neglected field. 
 
 The author wishes to acknowledge the valuable aid 
 given him by Miss Helen S. Willard, B.A., his chief 
 Eeconstruction Aide in Physiotherapy, and Captain G. 
 W. Ramaker, Vocational Therapy Officer of the U. S. A. 
 Base Hospital, Camp Meade, Maryland, in the collection 
 of data for this book. 
 
 H. E. S. 
 
 New Haven, Conn. 
 Sept. 1, 1919
 
 CONTENTS 
 PART I 
 
 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 CHAFTBR PAOB 
 
 I Exercise 1 
 
 Relation of Bodily Health to Muscular Health. Nerve 
 Strain of Modem Work. Necessity for Physical Train- 
 ing in Youth. Athletic Problems. Heart Strain. 
 Safeguards for Boys and Girls in Athletics. Proper 
 Exercise for Various Ages. Therapeutic Exercises. 
 Physiology and Pathology of Muscle Tissue. Exercises 
 for Stiff Joints. Setting-up Exercise. 
 
 II Baking. Hydrotherapy. Electrotherapy . . 27 
 
 Physiolo^cal Changes by Baking. Passive Hyperemia, 
 Hydrotherapy Definition, History. Properties of 
 Water. Physiological Effect on the Various Tissues and 
 on Body Temperature. Technique of the Various Baths. 
 Electrotherapy Types of Ciirrent, Uses. Ionic Medica- 
 tion. Alpine Sun Lamp. 
 
 III Massage 46 
 
 Definition. History. Tsrpes of Movement. General Con- 
 siderations. Effect on Different Tissues. Mechanics of 
 the Cardinal Movements. Therapeutic Uses and Con- 
 traindications. Treatment of Limb Stumps. 
 
 IV Vocational Therapy 7ft 
 
 Objects Therapeutic, Economic, Occupational Interest, 
 Morale. Co-operation with Physiotherapy, with Federal 
 Board. Types Bedside, Shop, Classroom, Field. 
 Scope Application in General Hospitals, Simple Equip- 
 ment, Relation to Industrial Accidents.
 
 X CONTENTS 
 
 PART II 
 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 CHAPTER PAOB 
 
 V Congenital Defects 91 
 
 \^lub Foot Types, Treatment. Hip Dislocation. Hibb's 
 "Table. Rickets Cause, Diagnosis, Treatment. Coxa 
 Vara Pathology, Treatment. Spastic Paralysis 
 Causes, Treatment. 
 
 VI Infantile Paralysis 97 
 
 Pathology. Treatment in Active Stage. After-treatment. 
 Exercises for Paralyzed Arm and Leg. 
 
 VII The Spine Diseases and Injuries 106 
 
 Anatomy. Tuberculosis Diagnosis, Symptoms, Treat- 
 ment. Traumatic Injuries, Strain and Sprain. Sacro- 
 iliac Strapping. Treatment of Bruises. Fractures and 
 Dislocations Diagnosis, Treatment. Penetrating 
 Wounds. 
 
 VIII Curvature of the Spine HI 
 
 Kyphosis Tjrpes, Causes, Symptoms, Treatment, 
 Program of Exercises. Lordosis Occurrence, Causes, 
 Sequelae, Program of Exercises. Scoliosis Pathology, 
 Rotation, Occurrence, Classifications, Causes, Treat- 
 ment. Exercise Programs for the Various Types. 
 
 IX Joint Injuries and Arthritis 135 
 
 General Anatomy. Traiunatic Lesions. Strain and 
 Sprain Treatment. Arthritis. Toxic Arthritis. Ar- 
 thritis Deformans, or Rheumatoid Arthritis Diagnosis, 
 Treatment. Acute Rheumatic Arthritis. Tuberculous 
 Arthritis Diagnosis, Treatment. Gonorrheal Ar- 
 thritis Diagnosis, Treatment. Syphilitic Arthritis 
 Diagnosis, Treatment. 
 
 X Diseases of Bones 146 
 
 Periostitis Pathology, Diagnosis, Treatment. Osteitis. 
 OsteomyeUtis Diagnosis, Treatment. Osteomalacia 
 Diagnosis, Treatment.
 
 CONTENTS xi 
 
 CHAPTEB PAGB 
 
 XI Fractures and Dislocations. The Upper Ex- 
 
 tremity 152 
 
 The Clavicle. Sternoclavicular Dislocations. Fractures. 
 Acromioclavicular Dislocations. The Scapula. Fractures. 
 Shoulder Joint, Surgical Anatomy. Types of Dis- 
 location. Fractures of the Humerus. Anatomica.' Neck. 
 Shaft. Supracondyloid. Epicondyloid. Epitrochlear. 
 Fractures. Involving the Elbow. Types. Olecranon 
 Dislocations of tho Elbow. Types. Myositis Ossificans, 
 Traumatica. Dislocations of the Radial Head. Ankylosis 
 of the Elbow. Fracture of the Head of the Radius. 
 Fractures of the Shaft. Fractures of the Radius and 
 Ulna. The Wrist. CoUes Fracture, Dislocations. The 
 Hand Fractures, Dislocations. 
 
 XII Fractures and Dislocations (Continued). The 
 
 Lower Extremity 183 
 
 The Pelvis. Types of Fracture. Dislocation of the Sym- 
 physis. Dislocations of the Hip Joint. Fractures of the 
 Femur. Upper End. Shaft. Lower End. Fractures and 
 Dislocations of the Patella. Dislocation of the Knee. 
 Fracture and Dislocation of the Semilunar Cartilages. 
 Rupture of the Crucial Ligament. Fractures of the 
 Upper End of the Tibia and Fibula. Fractures of the 
 Shaft. Lower End. Pott's Fracture. Dislocations of the 
 Ankle. Fractures of the Metatarsus. 
 
 XIII Foot Strain . y. 205 
 
 y 
 
 The Main Arch. Types of Flat Foot Causes, Diagnosis, 
 Treatment, Strapping, Plates, Exercise, Programs. The 
 Anterior Arch. Metatarsalgia Causes, Diagnosis, Exer- 
 cises. Foot Ailments in the Army. Foot Strain- 
 Literature, Military Viewpoint, Classification, Anatomy, 
 Methods of Examination. Diagnosis and Treatment of 
 Weak Foot. Flaccid Flat Foot. Rigid Foot. Acute and 
 Chronic Foot Strain. Hammer Toe. Corrective Shoe 
 Appliances. Minor Foot Ailments. Synovitis. Blisters. 
 Abrasions. Tissues. Overriding Toes. Corns. Callosi- 
 ties. Warts. Sweating Feet. Chilblains. Trench Foot. 
 Shoe Fitting. Prescriptions.
 
 xii CONTENTS 
 
 CHAFTKR PAOB 
 
 XIV Braces and Casts 229 
 
 Braces for Arch, Club Feet, Knee, Bowleg, Knock Knee. 
 Infantile Leg. Spine. Casta. Care and Preparation of 
 Plaster Technique. 
 
 Glossart .... 235 
 
 Index 237
 
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 no. PAGE 
 
 1 Entire Scapula, Except Part of Acromion, Missing . . 5 
 
 2 Gain from Complete Disability in Six Weeks of Physio- 
 
 therapy 5 
 
 3 Severe Shrapnel Wound of Left Shoulder with Com- 
 
 pound Comminuted Fracture of 6th and 7th Ribs . 11 
 
 4 Slanting Ladder, Use of Body Weight to Secure Passive 
 
 Flexion of Stiff Knee Joint 15 
 
 5 Suspension Used to Stretch Adhesive Bands in Right 
 
 Elbow 15 
 
 6 Chipping of Humeral Head and Extensive Wound of 
 
 Shoulder 21 
 
 7 Abduction Assisted Largely by Scapular Rotation Well 
 
 Controlled 21 
 
 8 Hyi)erextension Limited by Scar Tissue and Adhesions . 21 
 
 9 Muscle Contraction Test for Nerve Injury. Faradic 
 
 Battery and Generator 25 
 
 10 Baking. Electric Light Bath of Knee ..... 26 
 
 11 Diathermy. Electrical Heat Penetration for Deep 
 
 Hyperaemia 26 
 
 11a Multiplex Sinusoidal Machine 31 
 
 lib High Frequency Machine 31 
 
 lie Alpine Sun Lamp, Ultra Violet Ray 32 
 
 12 Electro-Motor Points, Upper Extremity 37 
 
 13 Electro-Motor Points, Lower Extremity 38 
 
 14 Electro-Motor Points, Trunk 41 
 
 15 Massage. Effleurage or Stroking of Forearm ... 47 
 
 16 Massage. Petrissage or Kneading of Calf .... 47 
 
 17 Passive Stretching of a Flexion Contracture at the Elbow 61 
 
 18 Massage. Friction Here Used to Loosen Scar Tissue . 51 
 
 19 Massage. Tapotement or Hacking of Muscle ... 55 
 
 xiii
 
 xiv LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 FIG. PAGE 
 
 20 Posterior Half Cast to Prevent Foot Drop .... 55 
 
 21 High Explosive Wound of Left Hand 59 
 
 22 Loss of 3d and 4th Metacarpals 59 
 
 23 Basket-Making 77 
 
 24 Telegraphy 77 
 
 25 Clay Modeling 78 
 
 26 Chair Caning 78 
 
 27 Wood Toy Making 78 
 
 28 Teaching the Beginnings of Mechanical Principles . . 83 
 
 29 Adjustable Foot Appliances 87 
 
 30 Musical Knowledge Reapplied to an Instrument the 
 
 Man's Disability Will Allow Him to Play .... 88 
 
 31 Automobile Repair Shop 88 
 
 32 Woodworking 88 
 
 33 Carriage Which Reduces Friction and Allows on a 
 Smooth Surface a Wide Range of Movement with Slight 
 
 Effort 95 
 
 34 Wire Cockup Splint for Wrist Drop, Light in Weight, 
 
 and Requires no Bandaging 95 
 
 35 Self -Correction for Right Dorsal Left Lumbar Scoliosis . 125 
 
 36 Spring Sitting-Position in Right Dorsal Left Lumbar 
 
 Scoliosis 125 
 
 37 Osteomyelitis of Lower End of Tibia and Osteo- Arthritis 
 
 of Ankle Joint 147 
 
 38 External Condyle of Femur Shot Away. Osteomyelitis 
 
 and Ankylosis 147 
 
 39 Cabot Posterior Leg Splint 155 
 
 40 Airplane Splint with Elbow Joint 155 
 
 41 Abduction Splint for Shoulder 159 
 
 42 Humeral Extension Splint 159 
 
 43 Comminuted Gunshot Fracture of Glenoid and Humerus 
 
 at Surgical Neck, with Large Amount of Bone De- 
 struction 163 
 
 44 Humeral Neck and Head Fractured, Beginning Bony 
 
 Union. Shrapnel in the Head 163 
 
 45 Extensive Shrapnel Wound of Right Arm with Com- 
 
 pound Conuninuted Fracture of Humerus . . . 171
 
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 XV 
 
 FIQ. PAQB 
 
 46 Machine-Gun Bullet Through Condyles of the Left 
 
 Humerus 171 
 
 47 Old Infected Gunshot Wound of Upper End of Right 
 
 Radius and Ulna Involving Elbow Joint .... 171 
 
 48 \ Compound Comminuted Fracture, Oblique of Radius 
 
 49 J and Transverse of Ulna with Over-Riding of Frag- 
 
 ments 175 
 
 50 Loss of Bone in the 2d and 3d Metacarpals with New 
 
 Joint Formation 175 
 
 51 Loss of Portion of 2d and 3d Metacarpal .... 175 
 
 52 Extension Applied to Fracture of Both Bones of the 
 
 Forearm 179 
 
 53 Bradford Frame with Extension Applied to Leg for 
 
 Fracture of Femur with Shortening 179 
 
 54 Caliper Walking Splint 189 
 
 55 High Explosive Shell Wound of the Hip, Sustained July 
 
 14, 1918 189 
 
 56 Fracture of Tibia, Compound Comminuted, with Large 
 
 Loss of Bone Substance 199 
 
 57 Fall fom Horse Causing Fracture Through Head of 
 
 Astragalus 199 
 
 58 Compound Comminuted Fracture of Tibia and Fibula . 199 
 
 59 Exercise 11. Walking Forward on Outer Edge . . . 207 
 
 60 Exercise III. Rising on Toes, Toeing In .... 207 
 
 61 Exercise IV. Walking Forward on Outer Edge, Toeing 
 
 In 207 
 
 62 Exercise V. Ground Gripper Walk 207 
 
 63 The Hammock Arch Plate 213 
 
 64 The Hammock Arch Applied 213
 
 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 AND ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 PART I 
 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 Chapter I 
 EXERCISE 
 
 The health of the body is, in the last analysis, abso- 
 lutely dependent upon the health and tone of the muscular 
 system. The condition of the heart muscle and the non- 
 striated fibers of the blood vessels and gastrointestinal 
 tract, are profoundly influenced by the tone of the skeletal 
 muscles. Many glands are stimulated both directly and 
 indirectly as a result of proper muscular activity. These 
 statements are obvious, almost trite, and yet they are 
 constantly overlooked. The physician often treats first 
 by drugs, then with attention to diet and sleep, and lastly, 
 if at all, by exercise. 
 
 In modem business and industrial life the premium is 
 placed upon nervous activity and very fine muscular co- 
 ordination. This type of work is exhausting without any 
 corresponding upbuilding of vigor. Physical work in- 
 volving larger groups of muscles, while equally tiring,
 
 2 PHYSICAL EECONSTRUCTION 
 
 tends to build up both the muscular structure and the 
 general health. Years ago even the skilled artisan used 
 to move about the plant selecting his materials, perform- 
 ing quite varied operations upon them, and perhaps car- 
 ried the finished product to the shipping room. There- 
 fore he was compelled to take a certain amount of general 
 exercise. Modem efficiency has ruled that cheap labor 
 shall bring in these materials, perform the easier opera- 
 tions, and remove the finished product, while the arti- 
 san's entire time is occupied in repeating, hundreds of 
 times daily, some one or two specialized movements, 
 which usually require prolonged, acute attention and 
 delicate coordination. Thus only certain small muscle 
 groups are apt to be used. 
 
 The same tendency is seen in modem business and 
 professional life, where present appliances make it pos- 
 sible to conduct a whole day's business from the office 
 chair. 
 
 The many occupations which require standing for 
 hours subject those muscles which maintain the upright 
 posture to strain, rather than exercise. The work of 
 the heart, unassisted by alternating muscular compres- 
 sion and relaxation applied to the veins, is greatly in- 
 creased, and the muscles and ligaments of the foot are 
 subject to a distinct strain. It must be clear, then, since 
 most occupations resemble more or less one or the other 
 of the three types of occupations mentioned, that the 
 average person under modern conditions does not have 
 sufficient exercise for the maintenance of the best effi- 
 ciency. That women, as a class, with the added handicap
 
 EXERCISE 3 
 
 of dress and social restrictions, take far too little exercise 
 every one will recognize. 
 
 There is no escape from the tendency of modem life 
 further and further to restrict normal exercise and in- 
 crease the strain of professional and industrial life. I 
 take it to be of the utmost importance that we should 
 see to it that every child and youth be given the oppor- 
 tunity to lay by a surplus in his bank account of health, 
 for these certain and severe strains which modem life 
 makes it impossible for him to avoid. Since we have 
 become a city-dwelling nation, with extremely limited 
 play space, the youth is not so apt to be endowed with a 
 vigorous muscular system at the beginning of his life 
 work as were his father and grandfather. Until we have 
 multiplied our playground, recreational center, and 
 school gymnasium appropriations many times over, wo 
 shall suffer as a nation from this lack of muscular vigor. 
 
 That every child should have a thorough physical 
 training is recognized by every physician. There are, 
 however, problems closely associated with modem ath- 
 letics which relate to possible overstrain of heart and 
 disturbed blood pressure, which are not universally un- 
 derstood. During my experience in the physical educa- 
 tion of both girls and boys, I was struck with the lack 
 of definite knowledge in the profession of the results of 
 vigorous athletic training on the heart and blood pres- 
 sure. 
 
 The heart becomes stronger, the cardiovascular ad- 
 justment more perfect, and the blood pressure is not 
 raised, by athletic training. Safeguards that the physi-
 
 4 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 cian should insist "upon in all athletic sports in both boys 
 and girls are, first, preliminary medical examination; 
 second, constant trained supervision; third, play only 
 when in perfect health. I want to emphasize the fact that 
 the delicate child can be built up, and should be encour- 
 aged to exercise when carefully watched; that the heart 
 is a muscle, and as such can be increased in both size 
 and strength when carefully kept from strain. 
 
 The physician's advice is often sought by parents in 
 regard to the proper amount of physical training that 
 should be taken by the normal child. Such advice can 
 hardly be given without a knowledge of the circumstances 
 surrounding the exercise, which may have a marked effect 
 upon the benefits derived. The number and length of the 
 periods per week, their time relation to meals and fa- 
 tigue, temperature, ventilation, apparatus used, and the 
 way the schedule is graded, all are important. 
 
 Nearly every normal boy goes in for athletics. His 
 enthusiasm, and that of the coach who must produce a 
 winning team, make it very easy to overstep the limits of 
 safety. We must remember that the boy, as a rule, id 
 carrying a heavy burden of growth, development, study, 
 and extra-curriculum activity. 
 
 It must be constantly kept in mind that the growth 
 of the heart and larger blood vessels is from one to two 
 years behind the rest of the body, during adolescence. 
 For this reason heart strain is more common than gen- 
 erally realized. Such games as basketball, football, and 
 hockey should be broken up by frequent rest periods. I 
 believe no secondary-school boy should run farther than
 
 fe* 
 
 
 o 
 
 J 
 
 H . 
 
 
 H 

 
 \. .' 
 
 ^
 
 EXERCISE 7 
 
 the 220-yard dash. Cross-country running and distance 
 runs should be reserved for college days. The marathon, 
 or even modified marathon run, is fraught with the grav- 
 est danger to heart and kidneys, as shown by the work of 
 W. L. Savage of New York. 
 
 No boy should be allowed to participate in more than 
 one major sport at one time, and intervals between train- 
 irig'seasons are desirable. Many breakdowns occur from 
 indulging in athletics when suffering from slight illness, 
 such as tonsillitis, or attempting to return to sport too 
 soon after the cardiac muscle has been impaired by the 
 toxins of disease. 
 
 The recent rapid growth of girls' athletics has brought 
 us face to face with the same problems in regard to heart 
 strain or overindulgence that we have found in athletic 
 training for boys. My experimental study, * * The Effect 
 on the Heart Rate and Blood Pressure of Vigorous Ath- 
 letics in Girls,*' American Physical Education Review, 
 1914, showed that even such violent sports as basketball 
 and track athletics were extremely beneficial when prop- 
 erly safeguarded. 
 
 In regard to girls' athletics, the work of Dr. Clelia D. 
 Mosher of Stanford University, and others, has modified 
 greatly our ideas in regard to the proper relation between 
 exercise and menstruation. It seems to be the unanimous 
 belief that we may safely be much more liberal in our 
 exercise allowance at that time; that marching tactics, 
 calisthenics, and club swinging have a distinctly benefi- 
 cial effect in lessening pain and disability. This is un- 
 doubtedly the result of a redistribution of the circulation 
 
 \
 
 8 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 and improved mental attitude. In fact, it is emphasized 
 that the psychical attitude is of great importance, and 
 that the girl should be discouraged from thinking of this 
 perfectly normal function in terms of illness. Among col- 
 lege women Dr. Mosher and others have succeeded in 
 lessening the pain and disability to a very marked degree 
 by exercise and treatment, the fundamental part of such 
 a program being deep abdominal breathing with jin- 
 creased use of the diaphragm by training. This may be 
 done with the patient lying supine and her effort directed 
 toward raising and lowering, to as great an extent as 
 possible, a moderately heavy book placed upon the abdo- 
 men. The more violent types of athletics, including jump- 
 ing and running, should be interdicted for at least three 
 days and longer, when necessary, in any individual case. 
 I am convinced that we are only at the beginning of our 
 knowledge of the possibilities of woman's physical devel- 
 opment. Already in such a sport as track athletics, in 
 spite of their very recent development and meager oppor- 
 tunities, girls are making records in the different events, 
 which range from two-thirds to three-quarters of those 
 records made by our Olympic champion athletes. Those 
 invaluable traits of character, loyalty, unselfishness, self- 
 control, and the team-work ideal, are developed by ath- 
 letics as in no other way. I have not seen, in my ex- 
 perience, the slightest tendency for athletics, developed 
 by coaches with the proper ideals, to make girls in any 
 way less womanly. 
 
 The sudden secession from regular exercise, which 
 usually comes at the end of school and college life, is
 
 EXERCISE 9 
 
 something which should not he allowed to occur. From 
 the vigorous games of youth the transition should he 
 made through the gymnasium, volley ball, and tennis to 
 such sports as hiking and golf, which can be followed 
 throughout life. This principle should be applied to both 
 sexes. In general, it is well for the physician to keep in 
 mind that, after a great deal of painstaking study, physi- 
 cal educators, as a rule, have come to the following con- 
 clusions: 1. That exercises of speed, those exercises in 
 which a certain distance is covered in the shortest time, 
 are not suited in their severe forms except to persons 
 in good condition from eighteen to thirty-five. 2. That 
 exercises of strength, which require all of one's energy to 
 perform for instance, weight throwing, weight lifting, 
 and apparatus work are suited to the ages of twenty 
 to thirty-five. 3. That exercises of endurance, which con- 
 stitute many and rhythmical repetitions of easy move- 
 ments, such as distance running, walking, bicycle riding, 
 etc., are suited to any age up to fifty (they are self- 
 limited in childhood), the only exception being the period 
 of accelerated growth, as regards games and distance 
 running, before mentioned. 4. That exercises of skill 
 such as golf, archery, quoits, etc., are suitable through 
 all one's active life, and are invaluable, especially after 
 fifty. 
 
 Many games, such as tennis, may partake of several 
 or all of these types, and in advising in regard to them 
 one should be guided by the other general principles 
 already outlined. 
 
 I have appended a simple drill of ''setting-up exer-
 
 10 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 cises" which will make for general development, and a 
 set of exercises on the chest weights, which may be used 
 in the same way, but which is mainly intended to exercise 
 fully both actively and passively each possible joint. 
 These chest-weight movements will greatly assist in 
 the return of function after the disability following 
 fracture, dislocation, or arthritis. 
 
 Therapeutic Exercise. Turning from the value of ex- 
 ercise, as a means of upbuilding and retaining general 
 health, to exercise as a purely therapeutic measure, there 
 are several things to be considered. In the treatment of 
 patients by exercise much more enters into the problem 
 than the conditions relating to the involved group or 
 groups of muscles. The inheritance of the patient, the 
 environment in which he has been and that in which he 
 must remain during the treatment, and the special eifect 
 of his stage of development must all be carefully con- 
 sidered. The importance of the last fact has been too 
 often overlooked. For example, as E. H. Arnold of New 
 Haven has emphasized, in the giving of corrective exer- 
 cises to children during accelerated growth, more harm 
 than good is often done by overload of work or by the 
 superimposing of a strenuous exercise regime on the al- 
 ready too severe strain of growth, development, and 
 school life, which the child is carrying. Furthermore, we 
 must expect a far different reaction to exercise treat- 
 ment on the part of a patient who has left the ''elastic 
 age" of youth and entered the "connective tissue age(' 
 of middle and late life. It is also the physiological and 
 not the chronological age which it is essential to keep in
 
 Fig. 3. Severe Shrapnel Wound of Left Shoulder with Compound Com- 
 minuted Fracture of 6th and 7th Ribs. 
 
 X-Ray shows entire body of scapula missing, glenoid, coracoid and acromion 
 processes intact. Piercing fracture of ribs. Movements at shoulder limited to 
 40 of flexion and 20 of abduction. After four weeks of massage and exercise 
 active flexion to 80, abduction to 50.
 
 EXEKGISE 13 
 
 mind, as has been pointed out by C. W. Crampton of 
 Battle Creek. We have found in the New Haven Ortho- 
 pedic Dispensary many cases of children who had to be 
 taken from home surroundings for the simple purpose 
 of supplying them for a sufficient period of time with 
 adequate nourishment before the special treatment out- 
 lined could be expected to achieve the desired result. 
 
 There are four main types of exercise used: (a) that 
 done entirely by the operator (passive) ; (b) that done 
 by the patient assisted in varying degrees by the opera- 
 tor (assistive) ; (c) that done wholly by the patient 
 (active) ; (d) that done by the patient opposed by the 
 operator ^weights, friction, or the opposing group of 
 muscles (resistive). The muscular contraction in the last 
 type has been further divided into three varieties, ac- 
 cording to the direction of the movement of the muscle 's 
 insertion in relation to its origin. For instance, in the 
 contraction of the biceps when opposed by the action of 
 the triceps (self -resistive exercise), the former may 
 slowly overcome the pull of the latter and its origin and 
 insertion be brought nearer together concentric contrac- 
 tion; or the power of both may be equal, so that the 
 distance between the origin and insertion remains un- 
 changed static contraction; or the pull of the triceps 
 may be greater, bringing further apart the points of ori- 
 gin and insertion eccentric contraction. 
 
 As we proceed in the development of the muscular sys- 
 tem certain changes in structure take place. With in- 
 creased bulk and tone developed by exercise there is a 
 tendency for the entire body of the muscle to shorten,
 
 14 PHYSICAL KEGONSTRUCTION 
 
 bringing its points of origin and insertion nearer to- 
 gether. We make use of this property of well-developed 
 muscle to shorten in the treatment of many orthopedic 
 conditions for instance, in a round-shouldered child we 
 exercise particularly the muscles of the upper back, there- 
 by retracting the shoulders. It might here be noted, as 
 will be emphasized later, that disuse, such as would fol- 
 low the application of a shoulder brace in this same 
 group, has ultimately the opposite effect, namely, to 
 stretch out and weaken the affected muscles and to in- 
 crease the slump. This shortening of the stronger mus- 
 cles is also seen where there is a lack of balance in the 
 power between two muscles or muscle groups having an- 
 tagonistic function as, for instance, following partial 
 paralysis. The less affected tends to shorten at the ex- 
 pense of the more affected muscle or muscle groups. 
 
 Muscles, then, are elastic, and will shorten when given 
 the opportunity. If this condition remains long enough, 
 real structural shortening ensues. For example, the 
 wearing of high heels for many years has a marked 
 tendency to produce structural shortening of the calf 
 muscle. This tendency to contraction is undoubtedly 
 due to the property of muscle called tone, or tonus. 
 Muscle tone is the result of a slight constant contraction 
 of many of the fibers of any healthy muscle. Tone is 
 increased in vigorous bodily health and well-developed 
 muscle and in response to mental stimulus. It is de- 
 creased during mental depression, bodily weakness, and 
 sleep, and practically lost under complete anesthesia or 
 other complete loss of consciousness.
 
 EXERCISE 17 
 
 Fatigue is a sluggish or subnormal response of a mus- 
 cle to its stimulus. This may be due to either a weak- 
 ening of the stimulus itself following injury or weakness 
 of the neurone, or to a deadening of the sensitivity of the 
 end-plate of the nerve in the muscle cell by the accumu- 
 lation of fatigue products. The first fatigue products 
 are stimulants to muscular activity, and this accounts 
 for the fact that a muscle works better after a few con- 
 tractions than at first. That is why we "warm up" a 
 muscle before severe exertion. 
 
 The early onset of fatigue must be carefully watched 
 whenever the muscle is subnormal. In regard to general 
 fatigue the point is often overlooked that it is cumulative 
 in its effect. This means that a little more work done 
 by a fatigued muscular system calls for the expenditure 
 of a tremendous amount of nervous energy. 
 
 Remedial gymnastic programs for the various ortho- 
 pedic conditions infantile paralysis, kyphosis, lordosis, 
 scoliosis, flat feet, etc., are fully given in the sections 
 where each is discussed. 
 
 CHEST WEIGI^T EXERCISES. 
 
 The position assumed for active flexion gives passive extension, 
 and vice versa. 
 
 Unless otherwise stated, the use of the shoulder height weights 
 is indicated. 
 
 1. Wrist. 
 A. Flexion. 
 
 Patient stands with back of hand toward weights, arms 
 extended downward and flexes. (Passive extension.)
 
 18 PHYSICAL EECONSTRUCTION 
 
 B. Extension. 
 
 Patient stands with palm of hand toward weights, arms ex- 
 tended downward and extends. (Passive flexion.) 
 
 2. Elbow. 
 
 A. Flexion. 
 
 1. Patient stands facing weights, arms extended forward. 
 
 Flex, extend. 
 
 2. Overhead weights. Arms extended upward, hands en- 
 
 cased in gloves and bound to handles if necessary. 
 Flex, extend. 
 
 B. Extension. 
 
 1. Patient stands with back to weights, elbow flexed shoul- 
 
 der high and rope over shoulder. Extend, flex. 
 
 2. Overhead weights. With arms at side, let weights flex 
 
 elbow. Extend, flex. 
 
 C. Pronation. 
 
 Patient stands affected side toward weights, elbow flexed, 
 and fixed at side by other hand or by operator. Lower 
 forearm across body and return. 
 
 D. Supination. 
 
 Patient stands unaffected side toward weights, elbow 
 flexed and fixed at side by other hand or by operator. 
 Draw forearm up and sideward and return. 
 
 3. Shoulder. 
 A. Flexion. 
 
 1. Floor or shoulder weights. 
 
 a. Patient stands facing weights, arms extended for- 
 ward, supinated or pronated. Lower arms and 
 raise. 
 
 5. Patient lying supine, head toward weights, arms 
 extended upward. Lower arms fore downward 
 to sides and raise. 
 
 2. Overhead weights. 
 
 Arms extended upward, lower fore downward and 
 raise.
 
 EXERCISE 19 
 
 B. Extension. 
 
 1. Floor or shoulder weights. 
 
 CL Patient stands with back to weights, arms extended 
 
 downward. Raise arms forward and return. 
 h. Patient lies supine, feet toward weights. Raise 
 arms fore upward and return. 
 
 C. Abduction. 
 
 1. Patient stands unaffected side toward weights, affected 
 
 arm across body. 
 
 a. Abduction in a lateral plane, elbow flexed. Ex- 
 tend elbow. Keep at shoulder level. Return. 
 
 h. Carry straight arm forward and sideward at shoul- 
 der level. Return. 
 
 2. Floor weights. 
 
 Patienl lies supine, feet to weights. Raise arm side- 
 ward, return. 
 
 D. Adduction. 
 
 1. Patient stands, affected side toward weights, arm ex- 
 
 tended, shoulder level. Carry arm forward across 
 chest, keeping straight or flexing elbow, then ad- 
 ducting shoulder. Return. 
 
 2. Floor weights. 
 
 Patient lies supine, head to weights, arm extended 
 upward. Lower sideward, raise. 
 
 3. Overhead weights. 
 
 a. From extended arm. Lower and raise. 
 
 (1) Carry arm obliquely fore downward. 
 
 (2) Carry arm side downward. 
 
 (3) Carry arm obliquely back downward. 
 
 Combination of adduction and abduction. 
 
 Raise arm sideward to shoulder level, carry forward and 
 return, carry backward and return.
 
 20 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 4. Trunk. 
 
 Resistance to forward, backward, and lateral bending of 
 the trunk is obtained by fixing the handle of the 
 weights at given points in relation to the trunk. The 
 higher the weight is fixed, the greater the resistance 
 given. The weight may be fixed on abdomen, chest, 
 head, or arms extended over the head. 
 
 5. Thigh. Foot bound to handle by special slipper or loop at- 
 
 tached to shoe. 
 
 A. Flexion. 
 
 1. Floor attachment. 
 
 a. Patient supine, feet toward weights, knee flexed or 
 
 straight. Flex, extend. 
 h. Patient lying on side, feet toward weights, knee 
 
 flexed or straight. Flex, extend. 
 c. Patient standing, back to machine. Flex, extend. 
 
 B. Extension. 
 
 1. Floor attachment. 
 
 a. Patient supine, head toward weights, knee flexed 
 
 or straight. Extend, flex. 
 h. Patient lying on side, head toward weights, knee 
 
 flexed or straight. Extend, flex. 
 c. Patient standing, facing weights. Extend, flex. 
 
 C. Abduction. 
 
 1. Floor attachment. 
 
 Patient stands or lies supine, unaffected side toward 
 weights. Abduct, return. 
 
 D. Adduction. 
 
 1. Floor attachment. 
 
 Patient stands or lies supine, affected side toward 
 weights. Adduct, return. 
 
 E. Rotation. 
 
 1. Floor attachment. 
 
 Patient lies prone, knee flexed, side toward weights. 
 (a. Unaffected side for inward rotation, h. Af-
 
 Fig. 6. Chipping of Humeral Head and Extensive Wound of Shoulder. 
 No active motion at first. Flexion after five weeks of massage and exercises. 
 
 Fig. 7. Abduction Assisted Largely by Scapular Rotation well Con- 
 trolled. 
 
 Fig. 8. Hyperextension Limited by Scar Tissue and Adhesions.
 
 EXERCISE 23 
 
 fected side for outward.) Rotate by swinging 
 foot sideward. 
 6. Knee. Foot bound to handle. 
 
 A. Flexion. 
 
 1. Floor attachment. 
 
 a. Patient stands facing weights. Flex, extend. 
 
 b. Patient lies prone, feet toward weights. Flex, ex- 
 
 tend. 
 
 B. Extension. 
 
 1. Floor attachment. 
 
 a. Patient stands back to weights, knee flexed. Ex- 
 
 tend, flex. 
 
 b. Patient lies prone, head toward weights, knee 
 
 flexed. Extend, flex. 
 
 Setting-up Exercises. 
 
 1. a. Arms to thrust raise, thrust forward, return, lower. 
 
 b. Arms to thrust raise, thrust sideward, return, lower. 
 
 c. Arms to thrust raise, thrust upward, return, lower. 
 
 2. Hands on hips. 
 
 a. Heels raise, lower. 
 
 b. Toes raise, lower. 
 
 c. Heels raise, knees deep bend, knees straighten, heels 
 
 lower. 
 
 3. Hands on hips. 
 
 a. Trunk sideward right bend, raise, bend sideward left, 
 
 raise. 
 
 b. Trunk sideward right turn, return, turn sideward left, 
 
 return. 
 
 c. Trunk lower forward, raise, bend backward, raise. 
 
 4. a-. Arms forward raise, carry sideward, carry forward, 
 
 lower. 
 b. Arms sideward raise, carry forward, carry sideward, 
 lower.
 
 24 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 e. Arms forward raise, carry upward, lower forward, 
 
 lower downward. 
 d. Arms sideward raise, carry upward, lower sideward, 
 
 lower downward. 
 
 5. Hands on hips. 
 
 a. Raise right knee, lower. 
 &. Raise left knee, lower. 
 
 c. Raise right knee, extend leg forward, bend knee, lower. 
 
 d. Raise left knee, extend leg forward, bend knee, lower. 
 
 6. Jump to stride stand, arms raise sideward. 
 
 b. Trunk bending, alternating right and left. 
 h. Trunk turning, alternating right and left, 
 c. Hands behind head. 
 
 Trunk bending alternately forward and backward. 
 
 7. Stationary running on toes with high knee raising.
 
 Fig. 10. Baking. Electric Light Bath of Knee. 
 Fia. 11. Diathermy. Electrical Heat Penetration for Deep Hyper^bmia.
 
 Chapter II 
 
 BAKING HYDROTHERAPY ELECTRO- 
 THERAPY 
 
 . BAKING 
 
 The result of the treatment of a part of the body by 
 superheated dry air is to cause a local dilatation of the 
 skin and subcutaneous capillaries, thereby thinning their 
 cell, walls and increasing the intercellular spaces. A 
 greatly increased amount of blood serum with its con- 
 tained food is thus permitted to pass out and supply the 
 tissue cells. This, and the increased removal of waste 
 brought about by the accompanying stimulation of the 
 lymphatic circulation, are the two essential factors in 
 shortening the period of tissue repair. 
 
 The common means employed to obtain this result are : 
 First, electric lights with reflectors, such as the thermo- 
 light; second, the adjustable local electric light bath 
 (Burdick) ; third, Kellogg 's thermophore; fourth, the 
 electric light body cabinet ; and fifth, the various types of 
 ovens heated by gas and alcohol, some of which are quite 
 inexpensive. For the application of heat to the deeper 
 tissues, machines for electric heat penetration are used. 
 The average length of treatment is twenty minutes. In 
 baking, the part must be well wrapped in a dry towel. 
 
 27
 
 28 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 Watch for scars or anesthetic areas. The heat is given 
 at 250 to 400 degrees. 
 
 Passive Hyperemia. This method of increasing local 
 blood supply by means of the constriction band placed 
 proximally to the part, tight enough to shut off the venous 
 return but not to impede the arterial inflow, is usually re- 
 ferred to as the Bier treatment. This method should 
 precede the other types of treatment indicated on the 
 part and its duration should not exceed ten minutes. It 
 is a valuable method of obtaining passive hyperemia, 
 especially in selected cases where means of procuring ac- 
 tive hyperemia are not available. 
 
 HYDKOTHEEAPY 
 
 Definition. Hydrotherapy is the application of water 
 to the surface of or within the body for the relief of 
 diseased condition. 
 
 History. The therapeutic value of this agent was 
 known to the Egyptians, Chinese, Greeks, Romans and 
 Arabs. Modem use of water for curative purposes be- 
 gan in the sixteenth century in Italy, France and Eng- 
 land, as shown in the writings of Lanzani, Barra, Wesley, 
 CuUen and Floyer. In the United States Rush, Lockette, 
 Bell and others have added to our knowledge of this 
 form of treatment. Among modem writers none have 
 contributed more than Kellogg of Battle Creek. 
 
 At the present time the use of hydrotherapy is being 
 greatly extended and its value more largely recognized. 
 While our larger sanitaria and hospitals have expensive
 
 HYDROTHERAPY ELECTROTHERAPY 29 
 
 equipments, it is possible to obtain most of the funda- 
 mental benefits from the various forms of treatment with 
 very simple apparatus. 
 
 Properties. The physical properties of water are all 
 made use of in our treatment. Its different forms solid, 
 liquid and gas all have their places. Added value is de- 
 rived from the ability of the water to hold certain salts 
 and minerals in solution. Varying degrees of the tem- 
 perature of the water used, and the force and amount 
 in which it is applied, each affect the result of the treat- 
 ment. 
 
 Effect. The main desired result is obtained through 
 the thermal and mechanical effect of the application of 
 water on the sensory nerve endings in the skin. Re- 
 flexly, changes are brought about in the circulation and 
 nervous system. 
 
 Circulation, (a) Distribution of the blood. The appli- 
 cation of hot water brings about a local hyperemia. Cold 
 water induces vasomotor contraction in the skin and 
 dilatation in the deeper tissues, followed later by cuta- 
 neous dilatation. 
 
 (b) Composition of the blood. A redistribution of the 
 blood cells shows a marked increase in the red blood cell 
 count in the circulation. 
 
 (c) Changes in blood pressure. By increasing the skin 
 elimination of toxins and blood vessel dilatation, we are 
 able to reduce high blood pressure. Hot and tepid baths 
 are used. The stimulating effect of cold baths will im- 
 prove capillary tone and raise the pressure when below 
 normal.
 
 30 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 Respiration. A tonic bath will induce deep breathing 
 and raise the general body tone. 
 
 Nervous SysteWr. (a) Stimulation of the nervous sys- 
 tem is secured by the various tonic baths. Vigorous rub- 
 bing and massage are helps in securing this result. Often 
 a hot bath will act as a stimulant. 
 
 (b) Sedative effect on the nervous system is obtained 
 by a long continued tepid bath. 
 
 Muscular System. The removal of local and the les- 
 sening of systemic fatigue is possible by means of the 
 tonic bath. 
 
 Skin. The direct effect of water applied to the skin 
 is that of a mechanical irritant. This action may be in- 
 creased by the use of salt, etc. The circulatory effect has 
 been described. The removal of waste matter is best ac- 
 complished by warm water. Cold water stimulates, closes 
 the pores and protects against cold. 
 
 Body Temperature. Cold water is now used freely 
 to lower body temperature in typhoid, heat stroke, etc. 
 It may safely be repeated several times daily if neces- 
 sary. It is a good general rule preceding every bath to 
 heat the body. Methods in common use are the blanket 
 pack, electric cabinet, electric cradle, or exercise. 
 
 Electric Cradle or Cabinet Bath. In using the cradle 
 (which is a frame wired with lights fitting over the pa- 
 tient in bed) or the cabinet (lined with lights in which 
 the patient sits) cover the head with ice cap or cold wet 
 towel. Take the temperature often and discontinue the 
 treatment when the temperature has reached 100 degrees 
 or the patient perspires freely. Indications All forms
 
 Fig. 11a. Multiplex Sinusoidal Machine. 
 
 Fig. lib. High Fpequency Machine.
 
 Fig. 11c. Alpine Sun Lamp, Ultra Violet Ray.
 
 HYDROTHERAPY ELECTROTHERAPY 33 
 
 of intoxication, gout, nephritis and the relief of internal 
 congestion. 
 
 Wet Pack. Wrap the patient in a wet sheet and then 
 several blankets. Be careful not to have the surfaces of 
 the body touching. Cold packs stimulate, warm ones 
 soothe. Treatment should average about an hour or to 
 desired physiological effect, and be followed by rest. 
 
 Evaporation Pack. This type of tonic treatment is 
 given for fifteen or twenty minutes. Cover patient with 
 wet sheet and one loose blanket. It may be given locally 
 as a compress, or as a body pack. It is well to use a head 
 compress also. 
 
 Neptune Girdle. Two sizes of binder 15" by 60'' and 
 18" by 72" will serve. Wrap the patient's abdomen in 
 the wet linen binder and cover with dry flannel one slight- 
 ly larger, being careful to exclude the air. Indications 
 Nervousness, insomnia, nausea and digestive dis- 
 turbances. 
 
 Abdominal Coil. Put on the linen binder, then the coil, 
 then flannel binder. Run water through coil 120 degrees 
 for 15 minutes; remain the rest of the hour. 
 
 Local compresses are used to relieve hyperemia. 
 
 Simple Tonic Bath. Sponge bath; apply water with 
 slight friction with hand or cloth. 
 
 Half Bath. Tub half full of water at 85 degrees lower 
 to 70 degrees or 65 degrees. Pour water over the patient 
 and rub with the hand; sit three to five minutes, then 
 apply the cooler water. 
 
 Drip Sheet. Stand in a tub of hot water. Hold the 
 sheet so that one-third is in one hand and two-thirds in
 
 34 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 the other. Dip in water; lift out and wrap around pa- 
 tient' and pour on more water duration three to five 
 minutes. 
 
 Sitz Bath. Sit in sitz bath, place feet in bath tub. 
 Apply water 80 degrees to 60 degrees. Keep rubbing the 
 skin, the patient rubbing the thighs and the operator rub- 
 bing the shoulders and back. For bladder disturbances, 
 pelvic congestion. 
 
 Use hot water for spasms, colic or chronic intestinal 
 conditions. The body surface should be flushed with 
 heat, followed by a cold shower to get a good reaction or 
 the patient put to bed with the room at an even tempera- 
 ture till the vessels regain their equilibrium. For con- 
 ditions following shell shock, irritable heart, hallucina- 
 tions, fearful dreams, and neurasthenia, the bath at 94 
 degrees is kept up for an hour or more. 
 
 Douche. Treatment begins with water 90 degrees, ris- 
 ing to 115 degrees and ending with 60 degrees. Continue 
 for two minutes. 
 
 Scottish Douche. Two jets, one 100 degrees, the other 
 60 degrees, applied alternately by a lateral sweep of the 
 nozzle up and down the spine. 
 
 Whirl Bath. For sensitive stumps or masses of scar 
 tissue, treatment by whirling water at 95-110 degrees, 
 mixed or unmixed with air, leads to a very marked reduc- 
 tion of sensitiveness and to active hyperemia, and is an 
 invaluable means of the preparation of the part for 
 massage or exercise.
 
 HYDROTHERAPY ELECTROTHERAPY 35 
 
 ELECTEOTHEBAPY 
 
 This important type of treatment is being rapidly de- 
 veloped and the scope of its usefulness greatly enlarged. 
 It is essential that the student of electrotherapeutics have 
 the elemental facts outlined for him in the simplest pos- 
 sible form. 
 
 The therapeutic effects of electricity are to produce 
 surface or deep hyperemia; to induce muscular contrac- 
 tion, either by changes in the chemical reaction within 
 the muscle or through its nerve supply; to soften scar 
 tissue ; to hasten the healing of open wounds ; to soothe 
 nerve irritation and to cause the direct absorption of 
 drugs by ionization. 
 
 Electricity is produced by chemical action, induction 
 or friction, all of which types are used in the treatment 
 of patients. 
 
 The type of current produced by chemical action is 
 generated in the galvanic cell as typified by the standard 
 Daniell cell, which generates an electro-motive force of 
 one volt. The simplest form of this cell is a quart jar 
 two-thirds full of sulphuric acid, in which is placed a 
 plate of zinc, the negative pole or cathode, and a plate of 
 carbon, the positive pole or anode. If a wire is placed 
 between the upper extremities the current will flow from 
 the positive to the negative pole. In the solution there 
 is a transfer of electricity from the zinc to the carbon. 
 During this process bubbles of hydrogen form around the 
 carbon. This is called polarization and may be great 
 enough to block the current, in which case the carbon
 
 36 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 should be removed and cleaned. In the dry cell a solid 
 substance replaces the sulphuric acid, but the action is 
 practically the same. Electric force may be either nega- 
 tive or positive in quality. Like types repel and unlike 
 types attract each other. 
 
 The definition of a few electrical terms is here in order. 
 
 1. Volt. That unit of electro-motive force generated 
 by the standard Daniell cell. 
 
 2. Ohm. The unit of resistance to the current offered 
 by one thousand feet of one-tenth inch copper wire. 
 
 3. Ampere. The unit of quantity of current which the 
 force of one volt will drive through one ohm in one sec- 
 ond. 
 
 McKenzie, Strong and others illustrate the meaning 
 of these terms by the comparison of electricity to water 
 power. If one water container is placed above another, 
 the force exerted by the water in the upper container in 
 seeliing the level of the lower is directly proportionate to 
 the difference in height, and is comparable to the reaction 
 between the positive and negative poles. The difference 
 in height represents potential energy and this force cor- 
 responds to the voltage of an electric current. The 
 amount of water allowed to flow from the upper to the 
 lower container corresponds to the amperage of an elec- 
 tric current. Upon the size of the pipe used depends 
 the amount and force of the stream of water. If a small 
 pipe is used the resistance (number of ohms) is increased, 
 the force of the flow (voltage) is high but the quantity 
 of water (amperage) is small. On the other hand, if a
 
 HYDROTHERAPY ELECTROTHERAPY 39 
 
 large pipe is used the resistance is decreased and the force 
 is lessened but the quantity of flow is increased. 
 
 In electrotherapy the type of current commonly used 
 has relatively high voltage but very low amperage, which, 
 for convenience, is measured in milliamperes. 
 
 Galvanism. The ordinary galvanic battery consists of 
 a cabinet containing a series of cells joined to a switch- 
 board with binding poles, to which are attached the cords 
 and electrodes for applying the current to the patient. 
 There are also appliances for measuring, interrupting or 
 increasing the current. 
 
 The galvanic is a continuous current flowing steadily 
 from positive to negative. It is used for the following 
 physiological effects : stimulation, sedation, nutrition and 
 chemical changes. Quite different effects are produced by 
 the positive and negative poles. There are two simple 
 tests for differentiating the poles. If the ends of the 
 cords are placed on blue litmus paper the positive pole, 
 because of its attraction of acids, will turn the paper 
 pink. If the cords are dipped into salt solution bubbles 
 will collect around the negative pole, which attracts alka- 
 lines. Where the anode or positive pole is used, circula- 
 tion, muscular contraction and nervous irritability are re- 
 duced. At the point of application of the cathode there 
 is greater muscular contraction, stimulation of circula- 
 tion and increased nervous irritability. Having selected 
 the proper electrodes for the desired effect, they should 
 be applied smoothly and firmly to unabraded skin. It 
 must be remembered that the electrodes should be cov- 
 ered with smooth felt or gauze thoroughly saturated in
 
 40 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 warm salt solution and should be proportionate in size 
 to the part treated. Burns are most likely to occur at the 
 cathode and this point should be most carefully watched. 
 The current should always be applied and decreased slow- 
 ly. This type of current is also applied by local bath 
 with one pole in the water, the other on the spine. 
 
 Ionization. Ionization is the induction of drugs into 
 the tissues by electrolysis. These substances in solution 
 may be driven in by the galvanic current. The ions of 
 zinc, copper and lithium, being electro-positive, should 
 be placed on the anode, by which they are repelled. The 
 ions of chlorine, potassium and iodine are electro-nega- 
 tive and are repelled by the cathode. "Weak solutions of 
 two or three per cent are usually employed. 
 
 Interrupted Galvanic Current. The constant current 
 has no effect on muscular contraction, but when it is sud- 
 denly shut off and again applied at both this break and 
 make of the current a contraction is produced. The 
 stronger contraction occurs when the current is made at 
 the cathode. A device called a metronome, attached to 
 the instrument, produces this effect. 
 
 A smoother type of galvanic current is the sinusoidal 
 galvanic, a current which flows evenly on the positive and 
 negative side alternately. It has a deeper effect on mus- 
 cular nutrition. 
 
 Faradic Current. The faradic is an induced alternat- 
 ing current, produced by charging one coil, the primary, 
 which then becomes an electro-magnet and when brought 
 into contact with a secondary coil charges it also. By 
 variation in the size of wire or the number of windings
 
 HYDROTHERAPY ELECTROTHERAPY 43 
 
 on the secondary coil, the voltage of the current may 
 be increased or * ' stepped up. ' ' This current may be made 
 and broken by the withdrawal and reinsertion of one of 
 the coils by hand, or may be rapidly done by mechanical 
 interruption. 
 
 The faradic gives a harsher stimulus than the galvanic 
 and acts directly through the nerves, producing a defi- 
 nite muscular contraction similar to that of a normal 
 muscle. For that reason one electrode should be placed 
 on a main nerve trunk proximately to the muscle to be 
 stimulated and the other should be placed on the electro- 
 motor point. The difference in polarily is slight, there- 
 fore differentiation is unnecessary. The close similarity 
 of this current to the normal nerve impulse makes it par- 
 ticularly valuable in keeping muscles in good tone when 
 normal exercise is impossible. 
 
 Most machines for the therapeutic work combine the 
 galvanic and faradic sinusoidal currents and they should 
 therefore be used selectively. 
 
 Sinusoidal Current. The sinusoidal current is also in- 
 duced and is therefore similar to the faradic, save that 
 it passes in a wave from zero to the highest force on the 
 positive side and then back through zero to the highest 
 force on the negative side and then flows back from nega- 
 tive to positive. This surging effect produces complete 
 muscular contraction, but is somewhat more gradual and 
 therefore more pleasant than the harsh stimulus of the 
 faradic. 
 
 Bigh Frequency. This is an induced current oscillat- 
 ing from one-half to five million alternations a second,
 
 44 PHYSICAL EECONSTRUCTION 
 
 with high voltage and low amperage. The different types 
 d'Arsonval, Oudin and Tesla are all used. To obtain 
 the current a resonator, coil (solenoid), adjustable spark- 
 gap and Leyden jar condensers are used. 
 
 Application to the patient is made by means of vacuum 
 electrodes or plates. Marked changes in metabolism are 
 produced with little discomfort on the part of the pa- 
 tient. 
 
 Diathermy. Another common use for this type of cur- 
 rent is the driving of heat deep into the tissues by means 
 of two pliable, flat metal electrodes applied on opposite 
 sides of the part to be treated. These electrodes should 
 be smoothed out and then shaped carefully to the part 
 and held firmly in place. 
 
 The resistance by the body increases the heat which in 
 turn produces marked deep hyperemia. In this way we 
 are able to drive heat deep into the tissue, as in the joint 
 cavity, and to prepare a part for massage or exercise 
 treatments. 
 
 Static Electricity. This current is produced by the 
 friction of revolving glass plates, charging brushes. Holtz 
 and Wimshurst machines have been varied for special 
 uses. The high tension obtained requires insulation. 
 
 The types of current are Morton wave for general 
 tonic, simple current for insomnia and ''breeze,*' sedative 
 effect on pain. 
 
 Sun Lamp. By means of the quartz lens light can be 
 split into its component parts and all but a desired wave 
 length excluded. The ultra-violet or actinic rays may
 
 HYDROTHERAPY ELECTROTHERAPY 45 
 
 thus be used alone for the chemical effect. These rays 
 have a marked bactericidal and healing action. 
 
 The patient's body, with the exception of the part to 
 be treated, should be carefully covered. Operators much 
 exposed should wear smoked glasses. An average ex- 
 posure is three minutes at a distance of eighteen inches. 
 
 Very satisfactory results have been obtained in the 
 quickened healing of open wounds by this means in a 
 number of our base hospitals where these lamps are 
 in use.
 
 Chapteb III 
 MASSAGE 
 
 Definition. Massage is the scientific manipulation of 
 the soft parts of the living body for purposes of health. 
 It is a mechanical interference with and modification of 
 the physiological function of the different tissues. 
 
 History. Throughout the animal kingdom we find 
 many instances of one animal massaging another or itself 
 by rubbing, licking or biting the affected part. Among 
 mankind it was known to the Chinese at least three 
 thousand years B.C., and was used somewhat by the 
 Egyptians and Greeks and by the Romans in their baths. 
 Among the Greeks, ^sculapius and his followers, the 
 Asclepiades, in their school of medicine on the Islands 
 of Kos and Knidus, were the first to systematize massage. 
 With the other arts and sciences it was submerged dur- 
 ing the dark^ages to reappear on the teaching of Pare, 
 Ling and Metzger in modem history. It was first used 
 extensively in this country by Dr. S. Weir Mitchell about 
 1877. 
 
 Types of Movements. There are four cardinal move- 
 ments used: 
 
 1. Eflfleurage or stroking. 
 
 2. Petrissage. Pinching or kneading. 
 
 46
 
 Fig. 15. Massage. Effleurage or Stroking of Forearm. 
 Fig. 16. Massage, Petrissage or Kneading of Calf.
 
 MASSAGE 49 
 
 3. Tapotement. Hacking, slapping or vibrating. 
 
 4. Frictions. 
 
 Objects : 
 
 1. To increase arterial, venous and lymphatic flow. 
 
 2. To improve skin function. 
 
 3. To soothe or stimulate the nerves. 
 
 4. To eliminate waste products. 
 
 5. To break down adhesions. 
 
 6. To reduce swollen tissue. 
 
 7. To improve nutrition. 
 
 General Considerations. Since by means of massage 
 we are going to interfere with the physiologic function 
 of tissue, a broad and thorough knowledge of physiology 
 is an absolutely essential basis for scientific work. Not 
 only the way tissues and organs act, but their structure 
 and location must be exactly known; therefore a com- 
 prehensive knowledge of the anatomy, at least of the soft 
 parts of the body, is of extreme importance. The too 
 great neglect of this valuable means of treatment has 
 been to a large extent due to the impression left on both 
 the physician and the public through the ignorant and 
 unscientific use of massage by a large proportion of 
 those claiming to be able to treat by this means. Al- 
 though one of the best contributions to this science was 
 made by the Swedes, many valuable features have since 
 been added to the theory and application of this form 
 of physical therapy. It is a mistake, then, to follow the 
 Swedish, or any other so-called system, to the exclusion 
 of others.
 
 50 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 The proven value of this form of treatment, and the 
 fact that in so many serious conditions its use is indi- 
 cated, make it a worthy branch of the medical science. 
 No person can be truly successful in this work who does 
 not approach it from the standpoint of service and who 
 is unwilling to make the personal sacrifice necessary to 
 gain a well . rounded knowledge of the entire subject. 
 The high type of young women entering the work for the 
 army will undoubtedly elevate the plane of this field of 
 endeavor. Let us hope that in the mind of the general 
 public the athletic ''rubber" and the Turkish bath at- 
 tendant will be hereafter clearly distinguished from the 
 true masseur or masseuse. 
 
 The close personal contact with the patient makes it 
 imperative that the operator remain constantly mindful 
 of the fact that the feeling of confidence and trust on the 
 part of the patient is an invaluable aid toward success. 
 Dignity, reserve and high moral tone are prerequisites. 
 
 In an oiBfice practice it is desirable to have a couch or 
 a padded table about three feet high and two feet wide. 
 The best temperature is from 70 to 75. Only the part 
 should be exposed which is being manipulated. Both 
 hands should be trained to equal skill and during a treat- 
 ment are usually kept in contact with the skin. Powder 
 is being increasingly used to lessen skin friction and is 
 in many ways preferable to cocoa butter, cold cream 
 or vaseline. The use of ichthyol or strong liniments to 
 produce counter-irritation is unnecessary. The length 
 of the average treatment depends upon the vigor and 
 concentration of effort, the object desired, and the size

 
 MASSAGE 53 
 
 of the surface to be covered, and varies from twenty to 
 fifty minutes. 
 
 Venous Circulation. Venous circulation runs in the 
 same direction as the lymphatic and is modified by the 
 action of the valves scattered throughout the venous sys- 
 tem. 
 
 Lymphatic Circulation. Its general course is from the 
 extremities toward the heart and is modified by ** stops," 
 individual or groups of glands. 
 
 Arm. From the tips of the fingers to the axilla, espe- 
 cially on the, flexor side. Gland in the elbow, middle of 
 the arm and chain in the axilla. 
 
 Leg. Largest vessels on the dorsum of the foot, the 
 back of the leg, popliteal space, inner side of the thigh to 
 the front above. Glands between the tendo Achillis and 
 external malleolus, the lower part of the thigh and the 
 chain of inguinal glands in the groin. 
 
 Face. The upper vessels center at the root of the nose ; 
 the lower ones go toward the neck. 
 
 Neck. Down the front of the sterno-mastoid and in 
 front of the edge of the trapezius, where most of the 
 cervical glands are located. 
 
 Chest. Superficial glands from the inner third of the 
 breast toward the sternum, outer two-thirds toward the 
 axilla. Deep vessels toward the sternum. 
 
 Abdomen. Generally toward the inguinal glands. 
 
 Back. Superficial circulation of the upper part to- 
 ward the axilla ; deep circulation toward the spine ; lower 
 back toward the sacral notches. 
 
 Stroking is always done in the direction of the lym-
 
 54 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 phatio and venous flow, the only exception being to re- 
 move secretions from an open wound. 
 
 MECHANICS AND PHYSIOLOGICAL EFFECT 
 
 Effleurage or StroMng. Stroking is done with one or 
 both hands or any part thereof simultaneously, alter- 
 nately or with one only and with varying degrees of 
 force, rapidity and duration, depending upon the part 
 massaged and the purpose in view. The object is to in- 
 fluence the blood and lymphatic circulations. The super- 
 ficial circulation is always affected, the deeper only by 
 added pressure. The direction is always toward the 
 heart with the exception noted above. 
 
 The skin is mildly stimulated, but this effect is les- 
 sened with the use of lubrication. 
 
 Sensory nerve endings in the skin are stimulated by 
 stroking and the sum total of the effect depends upon 
 concentration of the nerve endings in the part, the amount 
 of surface covered, and the number of strokes used. 
 Since stimulation depends upon variation, and nerve end- 
 ings soon become dulled to the same type and degree of 
 stimulus, repeated light stroking is in its sum total ef- 
 fect soothing. 
 
 The circulation may be greatly modified by stroking. 
 No measurable effect can be procured on the arterial flow. 
 Capillaries are dilated by strong stroking and contracted 
 by light stroking. Venous circulation can be markedly im- 
 proved. The stroking should be deep enough to compress 
 the vein, more rapid than the venous circulation, which
 
 Fig. 19. Massage. Tapotement or Hacking of Muscle. 
 
 Fig. 20. (A) Posterior Half Cast to Prevent Foot Drop. (See Fig. 58 
 
 for X-Rav.>
 
 MASSAGE 57 
 
 is not more than five inches a second, and long enongh to 
 extend over the next proximal valve, which would be from 
 six to eight inches. The lymphatic flow will be aided by 
 slow, deep stroking, especially over the lymph glands. 
 
 The muscle can be directly relieved in fatigue through 
 the removal of waste products by deep stroking. 
 
 Glands can be stmiulated by the indirect effect of cir- 
 culatory changes in the skin. 
 
 In such bones as the tibia the periosteal circulation 
 and nutrition can be aided. 
 
 Several writers have called attention to the different 
 effects produced on muscle tissue by the different types 
 of massage. They consider light stroking to be both 
 soothing and relaxing and therefore indicated in spastic 
 contracture. Others do not massage spastic muscle at 
 all. 
 
 Petrissage. Pinching, Kneading. This type of mas- 
 sage is used mainly for its effect on muscle tissue. The 
 amount of tissue grasped would then depend upon the 
 part being massaged. Fine pinching is done between the 
 thumb and first finger. Coarser pinching between the 
 thumb and the side of the second phalanx of the first 
 finger, or the thumb opposed by the tips of all the fingers, 
 is good on a flat surface, such as the back ; to this twist- 
 ing may be added for more vigorous effect. The hands 
 may be used effectively close together and alternately, 
 one pinching while the other is re-grasping. 
 
 On the extremities the hands may be used on opposing 
 sides, completely grasping the various muscle groups. 
 The direction of the pinching should be at right angles
 
 58 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 to the muscle fibers. On the abdominal wall, where we 
 are unable to obtain selective action on the different 
 layers of muscle, it is well to knead in concentric circles. 
 
 Pinching the muscle fibers brings about a partial con- 
 traction of those having their nerve supply intact. Some 
 orthopedists believe a beneficial or a stimulating effect 
 may follow even where we find that the nerve supply 
 is entirely lacking. It is easier to obtain a partial con- 
 traction of a large number of fibers, or a complete con- 
 traction of a few by this means than by the use of elec- 
 tricity. Since only the stimulated part of the muscle re- 
 acts, we may by this means keep up the tone and health 
 of muscles in the immediate neighborhood of inflamed 
 joints, yet at no time cause an undesired movement of 
 the joint. For this partial effect the different nerve sup- 
 plies and the several heads of the various muscles must be 
 kept in mind. A beginner should early learn to differen- 
 tiate in infantile paralysis the thick, fat and connective 
 tissue layer which so often overlies the muscle and upon 
 which, without due care, the petrissage may be directed 
 from the muscle itself. ^ 
 
 Tapotement. Hacking, slapping, vibrating. This pro- 
 cedure is aimed at the skin and the muscles. 
 
 Skin slapping should be done with light, fast, alternate 
 strokes. The wrist should be relaxed, each hand instant- 
 ly rebounding from the skin. Superficial blood vessels 
 and later the deeper vessels are quickly dilated in this 
 manner. 
 
 Over groups of muscle the strokes are made alternately 
 with the ulnar sides of the hands. Here, too, the wrists
 
 Fig. 21. High Explosive Wound of Left Hand. 
 
 Loss of third and fourth fingers and part of hand. Function good following 
 exercise and massage. (X-ray Fig. 22.) 
 
 Fig. 22. Loss of 3rd and 4th Metacarpals.
 
 MASSAGE 61 
 
 should remain relaxed, the hand nearly open, the fingers 
 slightly separated. In this manner the fourth finger 
 strikes the part first, the others following in turn. For 
 harder striking, to relax a knotted muscle, for instance, 
 the hand may be held rigidly extended and the strokes 
 given more heavily, only the ulnar side of the hand and 
 little finger striking the part. 
 
 Another method is by the use of the partially clenched 
 hand, palm down, striking flat with the second phalanges 
 of the fingers. 
 
 Vibrating can be done by keeping the finger tip or 
 other parts of the hand in contact with the patient, the 
 wrist relaxed, and performing a shaking motion of the 
 whole arm. 
 
 The stimulation resulting from this method depends 
 upon the number and force of the strokes and the amount 
 of surface covered. 
 
 Frictions. Frictions are seldom used except on ad- 
 ventitious tissue in a number of pathological conditions. 
 The breaking up of scars and adhesions forms an im- 
 portant part of its usefulness. We generally approach 
 such tissue by concentric circles starting well out at the 
 periphery. Frictions of the spine are sometimes used 
 to stimulate the nerve roots. This manipulation is also 
 valuable in the reduction of callus. 
 
 THERAPEUTIC USES AND CONTRAINDICATIONS 
 
 Skin. Where the skin is dry, harsh and cold, slapping 
 will dilate peripheral capillaries, warm the skin and in- 
 duce perspiration. Oold, clammy, moist skin can be
 
 62 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 aided by frequent light stroking centrally above the part 
 to aid the venous circulation. 
 
 Glands. Inactivity of the sebaceous glands, followed 
 by the formation of blackheads and pimples, often oc- 
 curs where the skin is normally rather immobile. Mas- 
 sage will improve the circulation, mechanically squeeze 
 out the inspissated secretion and restore normal gland 
 activity. 
 
 Dandruff is the result of hypersecretion of these 
 glands in the scalp. The oil not being fluid enough, in- 
 stead of supplying the hair it collects in layers around the 
 gland openings and flakes off. The hair not being prop- 
 erly oiled, tends to dry and break off or split. Massage 
 of the scalp will stimulate gland activity and the return 
 of the sebaceum to its normal fluidity. 
 
 After chronic inflammation of the skin, for instance, 
 as caused by boils or carbuncles, scar tissue may be re- 
 duced. 
 
 Scars. It must be remembered that scars are com- 
 posed of connective tissues only and contain no sweat or 
 sebaceous glands and no touch, pain, or heat corpuscles 
 and are the result of wounds not healing by first inten- 
 tion. Frictions over and around scars will reduce the 
 amount of tissue in duration and the size of the scar 
 itself. Massage will prevent tissue contraction. 
 
 Atrophy. This condition is commonly seen after the 
 wearing of casts or on the soles of the feet after pro- 
 longed rest in bed. Massage is extremely useful here 
 in restoring skin function and hardening the soles of the 
 feet preparatory to walking.
 
 MASSAGE 63 
 
 Contraindications. 1. Hypersensitivity of the touch 
 corpuscles, which may, however, reflect the same state 
 of the mind, contraindicates massage. Parts covered 
 by hair must be well lubricated or shaved. This shav- 
 ing does not stimulate the growth of hair as much as does 
 the repeated irritation caused by the pulling of the mas- 
 sage itself. 
 
 2. Pimples or skin infection are not massaged. In case 
 it is necessary to stroke a skin covered with blackheads 
 and pimples, clean thoroughly before and again after 
 the treatment with alcohol or soap and water. 
 
 CAEDIO-VASCXJLAB SYSTEM 
 
 The Heart. The heart can at times be stimulated by 
 tapotement directly over its location, or this procedure 
 over the stomach may greatly relieve cardiac embarrass- 
 ment caused by gas formation there. 
 
 Pericarditis. Here the heart laboring under mechani- 
 cal difficulties which retard its action can be relieved by 
 stroking of the extremities, thus removing some of its 
 normal work. 
 
 Myocarditis. In the same way a weakened or inflamed 
 heart muscle can be relieved of some of its load. This 
 very obvious fact in therapeutic indications for massage 
 has been almost entirely overlooked by the general pro- 
 fession. Graded muscular exercise should, if possible, 
 be given in conjunction with massage. 
 
 Endocarditis. This condition can be aided in the same 
 way and, since cardiac dilatation is sometimes due to back
 
 64 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 pressure from the venous system, this mechanical aid 
 should never be withheld. 
 
 Contraindications. Tapotement and the more vigorous 
 types of massage may often be useless, but gentle strok- 
 ing in the direction of the venous return will always aid 
 a heart working under a handicap. Acute endocarditis 
 and purulent myo- or pericarditis and angina pectoris 
 contraindicate massage. 
 
 Veins. Dilatation of the veins may be treated by ele- 
 vation and stroking, which may, especially in the veins 
 of the lower leg, prevent them from becoming varicose. 
 Varicose veins cause a great deal of extra work to be 
 thrown on the heart through venous stagnation. Massage 
 by gentle stroking above and below. When the dilata- 
 tion is not marked or any sign of ulceration present, 
 slow, gentle stroking may be done directly over them. 
 
 Phlebitis. Here the walls thicken, a sign of inflamma- 
 tion in the vein, which may greatly enlarge, become ad- 
 herent to the surrounding tissue or break down and ul- 
 cerate. Later joint contractures may form in the knee 
 or elbow. Elevation and rest should be given in the 
 active stage. Later on gentle frictions and stroking at 
 the sides over the non-inflamed veins and above and below 
 the inflamed part, to aid in removing the swelling, is of 
 value. Contraindications. In varicose veins any pro- 
 cedure except stroking is to be avoided and even this is 
 not done when the walls are thin or ulcers have formed. 
 
 In phlebitis, during the active stage, or at any time di- 
 rectly over the vein, avoid massage for fear of freeing 
 a thrombus.
 
 MASSAGE 65 
 
 Lymphatics. Dilated lymph capillaries and spaces may 
 be massaged with stroking and deep pressure centrally, 
 with light friction added over the lymph nodes. Eleva- 
 tion is helpful. Contraindications. Active inflammation 
 contraindicates all direct massage. 
 
 Arteries. No disease of the larger arteries is amenable 
 to massage treatment. The compensatory circulation 
 may be improved in obliterating endarteritis. Arterio- 
 sclerosis usually begins in the capillaries and arterioles 
 in the distal extremities, the left leg being often the first 
 point of onset. The X-ray may show this condition. Tor- 
 tuous temporal arteries, arcus senilis, palpation of the 
 radial artery and high blood pressure are other means 
 of determining its presence. A general massage con- 
 tinued for years and well done on the extremities and 
 the veins of the surface will often arrest the progress of 
 this disease and may give partial recovery. The mental 
 attitude of these patients is greatly helped and this is 
 a most desirable and important element in the treatment. 
 Contraindications. Tapotement, when the condition is 
 at all advanced, and in aneurism, should not be used. 
 
 MUSCULAB SYSTEM 
 
 Myositis. Muscle soreness follows the insufficient re- 
 moval of fatigue products. Stroke centrally above the 
 muscle to open up the lymph channels and then stroke 
 over the muscle. 
 
 Knotted muscle, which occurs in athletes, especially 
 track, after severe exertion, is the next stage of the same 
 process, but includes as a rule the tearing of a few fibers
 
 66 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 with some serous exudate into the muscle tissue. Pro- 
 ceed as in muscle soreness just described but the stroking 
 of the muscle itself should be deeper and of greater dura- 
 tion with some friction added. 
 
 Muscle Bruise. Here, in addition, occurs hemorrhage 
 into the muscle with discoloration. If treated at once, 
 it is dealt with as in knotted muscle. Later the fibrin 
 glues the muscle fibers together and deep frictions must 
 be used to break it up. Work in concentric circles. If 
 neglected for some time the blood clot may become or- 
 ganized and a great deal of exertion must be put into the 
 massage and a longer time given to the treatment. Vig- 
 orous tapotement should be added. Occasionally it may 
 be necessary to make the muscle '* black and blue" again 
 by this means before the organized mass can be broken 
 up and the free play of the bundles restored. 
 
 Torn Muscle. This is usually associated with severe 
 bruising and is followed by true scar formation within 
 the muscle. This scar must if possible be reduced and 
 broken up in the same manner as for a bruise, but the 
 part should be immobilized between the treatments. The 
 bandaging should start above and below and work to- 
 ward the tear, thus keeping the fibers approximated. It 
 is evident that tight bandaging started directly over the 
 lesion would force the fibers apart and increase the 
 amount of scar formation. 
 
 ''Charley Horse'* is a subperiosteal hematoma which 
 follows deep bruising that involves the periosteum, tear- 
 ing some of its blood vessels. Frictions and stroking will 
 prevent organization and hasten reabsorption. This is
 
 MASSAGE 67 
 
 a common football injury of the front of the thigh and 
 its presence is indicated when, with knee raised forward, 
 the patient is unable to extend the leg. Contraindica- 
 tions: Purulent myositis, trichinosis, and muscle wounds 
 should not be massaged. 
 
 Atrophic Muscle. The commonest condition we deal 
 with here is infantile paralysis. The lesion is primarily 
 in the motor and trophic nerves ; occasionally the sensory 
 are involved. While massage is aimed at aiding nutrition 
 and stimulating any muscle cells and nerve endings that 
 may be alive, we must remember in children how de- 
 pendent we are for growth upon contact stimuli. These 
 are usually lacking, but can to some extent be supplied by 
 massage. Slapping and light tapotement with open fin- 
 gers are useful, and fine pinching, which must penetrate 
 the layer of fat and connective tissue and be directed on 
 the muscle fibers, is of great value. The intrinsic power 
 of all muscle tissue to contract is thus stimulated even in 
 the absence of motor impulses. Contraindications: In 
 the active stage of infantile paralysis no massage should 
 be used, and in advanced atrophy of old age or convales- 
 cence only stroking is indicated. 
 
 Spastic Muscle. Stimulating massage of the physio- 
 logical opponent is good and on the muscle itself gentle 
 stroking, which is now believed to be relaxing, aids the 
 condition. Some authors, however, call all massage oon- 
 traindicated in spastic muscle. 
 
 Sarcolemma or Muscle Sheath Inflammation. This 
 structure is often inflamed in places where a large number 
 of muscles lie close together and considerable friction de-
 
 68 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 velops during their overuse, as in the neck, forearm and 
 calf. The ' ' spike soreness ' ' of track men is of this type 
 in the opinion of some writers ; others class it as a neu- 
 ritis. Rest, baking and elevation are invaluable adjuncts 
 to massage stroking. Try to get between the muscles 
 with the tips of the fingers. In chronic cases where there 
 may be organized deposits, use deep friction followed by 
 stroking. 
 
 Tendon Sheath Inflammation. Tendons themselves sel- 
 dom are inflamed or injured. The sheath acts as a deli- 
 cate insulation within which the tendon moves. This 
 movement requires constant lubrication by a fluid se- 
 creted by cells in the inner layer of the sheath. Overuse 
 will exhaust this fluid and set up an inflammation (teno- 
 synovitis). Overproduction of fluid then takes place, 
 distending the sheath with pressure on adjoining struc- 
 tures. Fibrin may coagulate within the sheath and form 
 a painful, semi-solid swelling. In the vn:ist and ankle the 
 annular ligaments may partially shut off a portion of the 
 tendon sheath and, aided by gravity, hasten coagulation. 
 Occasionally the fluid may enter a joint cavity and float 
 the bones apart with a tendency to sprain and dislocate. 
 Any mechanical interference in the absorption of the ex- 
 cess fluid, unless it be a snugly fitting bandage from the 
 extreme distal part completely over the entire swelling, 
 may be injurious ; hence wrist and ankle supporters often 
 do more harm than good. The tight lacing of high shoes 
 is a common cause or an aggravation of this condition. 
 
 Treat by heat, rest, removal of constrictions and ef- 
 fleurage, with frictions if any coagulation is present.
 
 MASSAGE 69 
 
 Contraindications. Wounds and pumlent inflammations 
 should not be massaged. 
 
 BONES 
 
 Periostevm. Chronic periostitis may be greatly aided 
 by deep stroking, especially in bones, like the tibia, which 
 are practically subcutaneous. 
 
 Scar formation following tears may be lessened by 
 friction and stroking. 
 
 Hemorrhage beneath the periosteum has been de- 
 scribed under diseases of the muscle. 
 
 Fractures. The large callus that usually follows frac- 
 ture repair may be reduced by frictions. These calluses 
 may include some of the soft parts which must first be 
 liberated. Deep frictions working circularly from the 
 periphery to the center are best. 
 
 The action of the muscles may be greatly hindered by 
 having to work over such an enlargement. Occasionally 
 there may be great pain and discomfort from this condi- 
 tion. Even a small callus may cause trouble if situated 
 near the joint. Fractures involving joints, which have 
 been so common in the European war, have proven the 
 indispensability of massage treatment to reduce callus 
 and to break up foreign bodies and adhesions. Callus 
 formation interfering with joint movement may be too 
 soft to be disclosed by the X-ray and yet demands atten- 
 tion. 
 
 Faulty Metabolism. Such conditions as rickets may 
 be greatly aided by massage aimed at the circulation. 
 General body massage is often indicated and improved
 
 70 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 nutrition of the bones leads to increased formation of 
 red blood corpuscles. Contraindications. Immediately 
 after fracture and in acute inflammations, osteitis, os- 
 teomyelitis and periostitis, massage is not used. 
 
 JOINTS 
 
 Dislocations. Gentle friction and stroking will aid the 
 healing of the torn ligaments. In certain joints, for ex- 
 ample, the shoulder, there is a tendency for the disloca- 
 tion to recur and here the treatment should be delayed. 
 
 Sprains. These should be massaged at once in spite 
 of pain. Deep strokes and frictions aid in the removal of 
 extravasated blood and help to prevent its clotting. If 
 the case is not seen until the clot has organized it must 
 be broken up by deep frictions followed by stroking. If 
 this is not done the ligaments heal over the clot, which, 
 when it is finally absorbed, leaves the ligaments elongated 
 and relaxed with a tendency to frequent recurrence. As 
 I have before emphasized, there is no treatment available 
 superior to this, coupled with a support to prevent re- 
 sprain. 
 
 Synovial membrane is always involved in joint injuries. 
 There is an increased secretion of synovia by means of 
 which nature attempts to float apart the two inflamed 
 surfaces. This results in lateral insecurity of the joint 
 and this is where support is indicated. In the case of the 
 knee a posterior splint, which is commonly used, is not 
 the preferred treatment but a lateral hinged brace, which 
 prevents twisting and lateral strain, but allows normal 
 hinge movement, is indicated. Because of the relatively
 
 MASSAGE 71 
 
 poor blood supply, such injuries heal rather slowly, but 
 a week should suffice in the ordinary case. When repair 
 is delayed much beyond this time suspicion of the pres- 
 ence of toxins should lead to careful examination of the 
 teeth, gastro-intestinal tract, etc. Baking and counter- 
 irritation are of value. Massage should consist of ef- 
 fleurage above and over the sprain. In the chronic or 
 subacute stage the excess of fluid is absorbed, leaving 
 a gelatinous residue containing fibrin, which tends to 
 coagulate. Hard frictions, getting as deeply inta the 
 joint as possible, are then indicated. If coagulation has 
 taken place, small particles may be broken off and become 
 loose in the joint. In the knee the so-called **rice kernels" 
 are of this type. Here the joint should be fully flexed to 
 open it up and moved several times during the treat- 
 ment to shift the particles under the fingers. The next 
 stage in untreated cases, or in repeated sprain, is a thick- 
 ening of the synovial membrane which may not be ap- 
 parent for two or three weeks. Here, too, the joint be- 
 comes insecure with tendency to subluxation and re- 
 injury. The synovial membrane becomes thick and 
 spongy and rolls between the bones like dough before a 
 rolling-pin and a fold or crease in front or rear may 
 limit joint movement. Normal movement, well protect- 
 ed, still tends toward cure, but as a rule heat and mas- 
 sage must be continued for months before permanent re- 
 covery takes place. Contraindications. Infective in- 
 flammations, toxic inflammations when most acute, and 
 dislocation while unreduced should not be massaged.
 
 72 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 NERVOUS SYSTEM 
 
 Brain Diseases. The quieting effect of stroking, espe- 
 cially of the back, may be of service in mild states of 
 mental agitation. After a prolonged agitation, sys- 
 tem exhaustion may be lessened by complete massage 
 treatments. The persistent chronic constipation asso- 
 ciated with many of these disorders may be relieved by 
 abdominal massage of the type to be described. 
 
 "Softening of the brain" resulting from faulty circu- 
 lation in localized areas cannot directly be affected. 
 When it involves motor areas, however, the affected mus- 
 cle should be treated by reeducational gymnastics and 
 "muscle massage." 
 
 Apoplexy. Downward stroking of the veins of the 
 neck relieves congestion. Treat the paralyzed muscle by 
 "muscle massage." This has not only a distinct local 
 beneficial effect but a pronounced sedative influence upon 
 the patient's mental condition. Contraindications. In 
 acute inflammations of the brain, meningitis and hyper- 
 susceptibility massage should not be used. 
 
 SPINAL DISEASES 
 
 Injuries. The spine cannot be directly stimulated be- 
 cause of its location. 
 
 Infantile Paralysis. Stroking of the back may be 
 beneficial in the subacute stage. Local massage of the 
 affected muscle should not be begun until tenderness has 
 entirely disappeared, but thereafter it must be continued
 
 MASSAGE 73 
 
 until recovery or for a number of years. Contraindica- 
 tions. The acute stage contraindicates massage. 
 
 Functional Diseases. Improvement in diagnosis and 
 recent researches are bringing us more and more to the 
 point of view that pure functional neuroses are extremely 
 rare, and that there is usually an organic or functional 
 lesion somewhere. This should be diligently sought and 
 if found removed. 
 
 Neurasthenia. The nervous and bodily weakness ac- 
 companying this condition is more efficiently treated by 
 regular and complete massage than by almost any other 
 method at our command. Both mentally and physically 
 great benefit is usually obtained. The muscles are kept 
 in good health and tone without the expenditure on the 
 part of the patient of the energy which exercise would 
 require. Later on massage should be supplemented by 
 graded exercise. 
 
 Hysteria. General massage is indicated here when 
 possible for its general tonic effect. Contraindications. 
 Violent hysteria should not be treated by massage. 
 
 Peripheral Nerves. Thickening of the nerve sheath 
 following injury can sometimes be relieved by light strok- 
 ing. The nerves are often caught in scars following frac- 
 tures or extensive tissue destruction. They must be 
 loosened up and relieved from the pressure by passive 
 movements, friction and stroking. 
 
 Neuralgia. This is a symptom, not a disease. Mas- 
 sage may help to remove the cause. It is contraindicated 
 on the affected part. 
 
 Neuritis. This is commonly a result of some constitu-
 
 74 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 tional poison and the massage is directed toward helping- 
 the body eliminate the causative agent. The muscular 
 atrophy which usually accompanies severe neuritis can 
 be retarded. Contraindications. Massage over the af- 
 fected nerve is contraindicated. 
 
 ABDOMINAL VISCERA 
 
 Stomach. Vigorous tapotement directly over the 
 stomach will often assist in the elimination of gas which 
 may, beside causing local distress, be embarrassing the 
 action of the heart. 
 
 Intestines. Chronic Constipation. This is one of the 
 most common distressing and truly important conditions 
 with which we are concerned. Among the common causes 
 are enteroptosis with stretched mesentery, partially oc- 
 cluding the blood vessels and resulting in atonic muscula- 
 ture. The mechanical stimulation to proper peristalsis 
 is dependent upon the presence of a fairly large bolus 
 within the intestine and then a period of rest. This means 
 regular meals and not the constant nagging of small 
 amounts of contents without rest periods. It also re- 
 quires that we eat a reasonable amount of indigestible 
 residue, largely cellulose, to maintain the required bulk. 
 Lack of normal secretion within the gastro-intestinal 
 tract, adhesions and lack of the formation of regular 
 habits of attempt at evacuation may also be important 
 causes. Long dependence on drugging is unwise. We 
 must first not only eliminate, if possible, the cause but 
 bring to our assistance every factor that will aid in the 
 return of the normal function. Bodily exercise and espe-
 
 MASSAGE 75 
 
 cially abdominal exercise of the type outlined for lordosis 
 is very eflScacious. By massage we may increase the tone 
 of the abdominal muscles, thereby lessening ptosis, and 
 in most cases we may directly stimulate intestinal mus- 
 cle coats. Deep pressure with the heel of the hand or 
 the fist should begin over the cecum and follow the course 
 of the large intestine. Circular stroking should follow 
 the same course. Deep frictions should be thorough at 
 the hepatic and splenic flexure, where deep stroking from 
 back to front between the lower ribs and the pelvis should 
 be vigorously applied. On the left side the ulnar sur- 
 face of the hand in many cases may follow the sigmoid 
 flexure for quite a distance downward and forward. 
 
 Liver. Tapotement over the ribs covering the liver, 
 circular frictions over its free edge and gentle depression 
 of the movable ribs will stimulate hepatic activity. 
 
 Pancreas, kidneys and bladder are not treated by mas- 
 sage. 
 
 Hernia may be aided indirectly by bettering the nutri- 
 tion of the abdominal wall muscles, especially where a 
 truss is worn. Contraindications. Any abdominal ten- 
 derness, pregnancy, and all acute infectious diseases con- 
 traindicate massage. 
 
 Scalp. The scalp is often rather tight and its circula- 
 tion somewhat impaired. It can be loosened by finger 
 tip friction with considerable benefit to the circulation 
 and the growth of hair. 
 
 Limb Stumps. In all its range of usefulness massage 
 gives no more gratifying results than in the preparation 
 of stumps for artificial limbs. In a great number of cases
 
 76 PHYSICAL EECONSTRUCTION 
 
 at the Walter Eeed Hospital in Washington careful mas- 
 sage has worked wonders. 
 
 During the war many of the stumps were, under stress 
 of circumstances, operated on in such a way as to make 
 it extremely difficult to prepare them for weight bear- 
 ing. The chief pressure from an artificial limb is lateral, 
 but the soft tissue must be drawn down to form a cushion 
 over the end of the bone. Massage should be begun at 
 the earliest possible moment regardless of whether or 
 not the wound is healed. If effleurage is used great care 
 should be taken to prevent drawing up of the muscles. 
 The stroking should be mostly downward. Vibration 
 and friction are used concentrically from above down- 
 ward, loosening the scar and working to the very edge 
 of the new formed tissue over and around the end of the 
 bone. Where this technique is followed very few of the 
 blue, cold stumps, such as were common earlier in the 
 war, result and the whirl bath for theirrelief is unneces- 
 sary. 
 
 Simmmry. I would again emphasize the fact that it 
 is necessary to know thoroughly anatomy and physiology 
 and the reaction of the various tissues to strain, injury, 
 under-nourishment, etc. With this knowledge, and a gen- 
 eral idea of the technique of the main movements, the 
 masseur is at liberty to develop his own special technique 
 and method of procedure. One so equipped is in a far 
 better position to perform successful and helpful work 
 than one working merely from the mechanical standpoint, 
 be he ever so efficient in any given system or school of 
 massage.
 
 It paEECS tiire pieafaritly 
 
 Fig. 23. Basket-m.\ki.ng. 
 
 Can be begun while the patient is still hediiddtn. 
 and has therapeutic value in hand and wrist injuries. 
 
 Fig. 24. Telegraphy. 
 
 Instruction begins at the bedside and is carried on through the shop to fold 
 work.
 
 i'lU. 2."). ('lav AIoDKl.lXG. 
 
 One of the most valuable therapeutic measures for joint mobihty in the 
 fingers and hand. It can be used very early in cases where more complicated 
 work ia impossible. 
 
 Fia. 26. Chair Caning. 
 
 A trade of great vocational value with many varied movements of the hand 
 and arm which aid in restoring function. 
 
 Fig. 27. Wood Toy Making. 
 
 Ps3rchologically most patients become like children for a time. They are then 
 easily interested m toy making. Later this interest and incentive to work is 
 transferred to other things.
 
 Chapteb IV" 
 
 VOCATIONAL THERAPY 
 
 This branch of physical reconstruction is growing most 
 rapidly in its breadth of application to war injuries. The 
 problems met and overcome so successfully are those 
 which must in the future be met by the surgeon in civil 
 practice. The work done and the lessons learned will be 
 of the greatest value to the compensation insurance com- 
 panies whose interest in the men crippled in industrial 
 life closely parallels the economic interest of the govern- 
 ment in the soldiers. Insurance companies have of late 
 recognized that treatment of the insured by physiotherapy 
 in many cases is a paying investment, the men being 
 returned to partial or complete eflBciency at a much earlier 
 date than would otherwise have been possible. It is cer- 
 tain that vocational therapy will in the future play an 
 increasing role in the treatment of convalescent em- 
 ployees. The larger manufacturing concerns which take 
 care of their own compensation cases would in like man- 
 ner gain much from a careful consideration of these mod- 
 em methods of treatment, which have proven their effi- 
 ciency in far too large a group of cases to ever be con- 
 sidered fads. The facts are that we have as yet ex- 
 hausted but a small part of the possibilities which these 
 
 methods of treatment hold forth. 
 
 79
 
 80 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 Specifically, the objects of vocational therapy are thera- 
 peutic, economic, occupational and to improve morale. 
 In the early treatment of men in the army the therapeu- 
 tic indications control to a large extent the type and 
 amount, or dosage, of work outlined for a patient. For 
 example, a man with scar tissue contracture or fibrous 
 adhesions in the elbow joint, allowing only limited motion 
 in semi-flexion, may be put at planing in the carpenter 
 shop. This treatment is given the man as far as possible 
 on the prescription of the surgeon, as shown on page 59. 
 Such a prescription is given as soon as the man has suffi- 
 cient strength, motion and muscular control to make some 
 movement possible, this beginning usually having been 
 obtained by the preliminary application of physiotherapy. 
 For some time the man may be treated by the suitable 
 physiotherapy methods together with this simple occu- 
 pational work. With the lessening of his disability the 
 problems of his future value to himself and society are 
 taken up. The patient is either given training in work 
 which he has done before or takes up new work which 
 will bring him reasonable financial return and in which 
 his interest has been already aroused. If his disability is 
 such that he is unable to return to any occupation com- 
 parable to the one in which he was engaged in civil life 
 after the best surgical and vocational expert advice and 
 treatment, he is then trained in some line in which his 
 injury handicaps him little. His degree of disability in 
 its relation to his future earning power is calculated and 
 the difference made up to him. 
 
 Certain types of vocational training have as their main
 
 VOCATIONAL THERAPY 81 
 
 object the arousing of the patient from the mental and 
 physical lethargy into which he is so apt to fall. For this 
 purpose basketry or any simple creative work which oc- 
 cupies his time and interest has proven of great value. 
 Study with a teacher of the simple branches of learning 
 is also used to good advantage. 
 
 Interwoven throughout a man's entire treatment is the 
 inspirational idea. The personality of the teacher is, of 
 course, of prime importance. These men are so often left 
 with the belief that their disability has permanently un- 
 fitted them for their place in society that the time allowed 
 them for introspection may be more destructive to their 
 future efficiency than the wound itself. That these men 
 do not lack courage their glorious record has proven. 
 The problem lies in properly arousing . their grit and 
 stamina, which, during their stay in the hospital, has 
 become gradually inert. The man must be made to real- 
 ize that the noblest of all courage is the conquering of 
 physical handicaps by patient endeavor and that both the 
 instructor and the government realize the quality of man- 
 hood which such a successful fight requires through weeks 
 and months of persistent effort. Too much cannot be 
 said in praise of the splendid corps of aides who are 
 carrying their own discouragements in addition to lifting, 
 to the best of their ability, those of the men whom they 
 serve. Their work will live in the years to come through 
 the increased efficiency with which these men will carry 
 on. 
 
 For the proper attainment of the man's rehabilitation 
 a close and active cooperation must be obtained between
 
 82 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 the surgical, physiotherapy and occupational depart- 
 ments. It is essential that each understand and appre- 
 ciate the scope of the others. Between the man's voca- 
 tional training and his final status in civil life stands a 
 most important and efficient organization, the Federal 
 Board for Vocational Training. This organization is 
 prepared to give expert advice on the selection of future 
 work. It also aids the man financially to obtain better 
 training even to the extent of paying his tuition in voca- 
 tional training schools or colleges until he has reached the 
 best preparation of which he is capable. This done, the 
 government's debt of honor to the wounded man is met 
 and he is returned to civil life and self-support. Let us 
 hope that never again the old pension system with its 
 paternalism and attendant evils will have a place in the 
 government's care of its veteran soldiers. 
 
 In such a book as this no detailed description of the 
 methods used in the some two hundred and fifty occupa- 
 tions taught to convalescent soldiers can be undertaken. 
 I will, however, briefly state a few of the most useful 
 methods employed. At the bedsides are taught basketry, 
 clay modeling, wood carving, leather and bead work, 
 making of simple toys and the beginning of the studies of 
 English, mathematics, stenography, telegraphy, etc. In 
 the shops are taught carpentry, photography, automobile 
 repairing, vulcanizing, modem machine shop practice, 
 pattern making and a wide variety* of other trades. In 
 the class rooms stenography and typewriting, wireless 
 and the common branches of language and mathematics 
 are a few of the subjects taken up. This is further de-
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '^ 
 
 ^i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '^^ 
 
 - "^9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 #ii 
 
 *^ 
 
 
 5^ ^^i 
 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 K^ 
 
 ^Hj 
 
 
 
 1 /^ 
 
 
 . tmJ^L. 1 
 
 i 
 
 
 ^:l:-^- > 
 
 1 
 
 '^''' ^^t..^-^ 
 
 ii 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^M 
 
 ^^^^g 
 
 1^. 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^^i^^H 
 
 ^H 
 
 ^^el"' 'H 
 
 Phl ,,.,^ 
 
 ^^. ^ 
 
 tS^-JiZ^J^^ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 l^^^^^l 
 
 ^H 
 
 iK^''.J 
 
 isy ' 
 
 Sri 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 IHHH 
 
 Fig. 28. Teaching the Beginnings op Mechanical Principles. 
 Toys are here being made from tin cans.
 
 VOCATIONAL THERAPY 85 
 
 veloped, where possible, by field work in electrical con- 
 struction, surveying and other outdoor occupations. 
 
 Of special interest to the general hospitals wishing to 
 add vocational training to their equipment is the curative 
 workshop. This is an attempt to combine the simple 
 forms of vocational work requiring only inexpensive 
 equipment and limited space. The therapeutic indication 
 is the leading motive for treatment. In such a workshop 
 we would find clay modeling, which has proven invalu- 
 able in the treatment of stiff fingers and wrist. The 
 scroll saw and various lathe machines with adjustable 
 pedals offer unlimited possibilities for increasing mobility 
 of hip, knee and ankle. A simple kit of tools suffices for 
 mechanical drawing, wood working, shoe making and 
 similar occupations. 
 
 The talent of an artist is not destroyed nor his means 
 of expression lost when a physical disability interferes 
 with the particular method of drawing, painting, or play- 
 ing which he had formerly used. There are several cases 
 on record for artists following injury of the right hand 
 have quickly learned to work equally well with the left. 
 In the same way musical talent can be utilized. Pro- 
 fessional musicians are used in an advisory capacity to 
 aid men to choose that instrument or mode of musical ex- 
 pression which is not interfered with by his disability. 
 There is another value to this type of treatment which 
 must not be lost sight of and that is the inspirational ef- 
 fect of the music itself. Many a man will spend happy 
 and beneficial hours in the music studio instead of giving
 
 86 PHYSICAL EECONSTRUCTION 
 
 way to the mental depression and discontent of the in- 
 valid. 
 
 In the early spring of 1919 there were already over fifty 
 thousand patients in this country under treatment by a 
 corps of something over three thousand aides who are 
 teaching, as before mentioned, between two and three 
 hundred subjects. Vocational therapy will see increasing 
 growth and development, and must necessarily be one of 
 the last to be discontinued when this big chapter of our 
 country's history is closed. I wish again to emphasize 
 that the medical profession owes the same intelligent care 
 to our great industrial army which the government has 
 so efficiently given to its veterans of the Great War.
 
 Fig. 30. Musical Knowledge Reapplied to an Instrument the Man's 
 Disability Will Allow Him to Play. 
 Pleasure and higher emotional tone are derived from the production of good 
 music. 
 
 Fig. 31. Automobile Repair Shop. 
 
 This is one of the most practical, valuable and popular forms of vocatio 
 therapy. 
 
 Fig. 32. Wood Working. 
 
 Gives many possibilities for self expression, arouses the creative interest 
 and exercises almost innumerable muscle groups.
 
 VOCATIONAL THERAPY 89 
 
 (Orthopedists have found the following simplified form useful 
 in briefly outlining the reconstruction treatment which they con- 
 sidered best suited to the needs of the patient.) 
 
 EDUCATIONAL SERVICE 
 
 U. S. Army Base Hospital 
 
 Camp Meade, Md. 
 
 MEDICAL OFFICER'S PRESCRIPTION 
 
 Name 
 
 Ward 191 . 
 
 Diagnosis 
 
 Probable length of stay in hospital weeks. 
 
 Probable condition after completion of hospital treatment 
 
 Functional result to be attained. 
 
 In orthopedic cases check below: 
 
 .Abduction ..Thumb ..R....L 
 
 .Adduction ..Finger 
 
 . Flexion ' . . Wrist 
 
 .Extension ..Elbow 
 
 . Pronation . . Shoulder 
 
 . Supination . . Back 
 
 . Circumduction . . Toes 
 
 . . Mid-Tarsus 
 
 . .Ankle 
 
 ..Knee 
 
 ..Hip 
 
 Remarks
 
 90 
 
 PHYSICAL EECONSTRUCTION 
 
 PRESCRIPTION BLANK. FOR VOCATIONAL THERAPY 
 
 Please check below the general class to which this man's dis- 
 ability belongs, using double check for major disability and single 
 check for minor. 
 
 MEDICAL CONDITIONS 
 
 Cardio-vascular 
 
 Pulmonary Tuberculosis 
 
 Fimctional Neurosis 
 
 Insanity 
 
 Nephritis 
 
 (rastro-intestinal 
 
 Skin Disease 
 
 Gassed 
 
 Convalescent 
 
 Other general medical 
 
 SUBOICAL CONDITIONS 
 
 Orthopedic 
 
 Amputation 
 
 Eye, Ear, Nose 
 
 Throat Disease or Wound 
 
 Nervous System 
 
 Blindness 
 
 Deafness 
 
 Speech Defect 
 
 Severe Injury to Face or Jaw 
 
 Venereal Disease or Sequelae 
 
 Surgical Condition of 
 
 G.-U. System 
 
 Venereal 
 
 Non-Venereal 
 
 Other surgical conditions 
 
 Convalescent 
 
 This man is ready for assignments checked below (please i 
 elude all of which he is capable) : 
 
 Work in wards: Mental Physical 
 
 Classroom work not to exceed hours and minutes 
 
 daily. 
 
 Shop or farm work .... 
 Hours per day .... 
 
 Light Heavy 
 
 Outdoor Indoor 
 
 To be avoided 
 
 Medical Officer's Signature 
 
 (This prescription will be filed in the Surgeon General's Office 
 as a part of the Physical Reconstruction Register.)
 
 PART II 
 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 Chapter V 
 CONGENITAL DEFECTS 
 
 Club Foot. As this common condition is much more 
 often congenital than acquired, the congenital type only- 
 will be considered. There are four types. The deformed 
 foot (talipes) may be, 1. Extended and everted, equino 
 valgus. 2. Extended and inverted, equino varus. 3. 
 Flexed and everted, calcaneo valgus. 4. Flexed and in- 
 verted, calcaxeo varus. Simple talipes equinus is dis- 
 cussed under muscle-bound foot. 
 
 These deformities vary greatly in their resistance to 
 corrective measures. Eesistance in any given case in- 
 creases with age, therefore treatment should be begun 
 as early as possible. In very slight cases manual correc- 
 tion alone may suffice. In the more marked types a se- 
 ries of casts must be used. In the commonest type, 
 equino varus, emphasis must first be placed upon straight- 
 ening the foot, flexion being easily obtained later on if 
 necessary by tenotomy. The series of casts should be 
 as nearly continuous as possible and each should remain 
 on about two weeks. 
 
 Hip Dislocation. This condition is more common than 
 is generally realized and the difficulty of reading X-ray 
 
 91
 
 92 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 plates makes it necessary to use the utmost care in diag- 
 nosis. A neglected hip means an undeveloped or shallow 
 acetabulum into which it may be impossible to place the 
 head of the femur later on. It interferes with the devel- 
 opment of the bones and tends to an asymmetrical pelvis. 
 The table devised by Hibbs of New York has been used 
 very successfully in diflScult cases. Care must be taken 
 not to overreduce and create a dislocation in the oppo- 
 site direction, as has often been done. 
 
 BICKETS 
 
 Cause. We find rickets most prevalent among negro 
 and Italian children of the first generation. It is caused 
 by a lack of suflBcient lime salts in the bone, primarily 
 because they are not supplied in proper amount in the 
 diet. The prolonged nursing of children to the fifteenth 
 or even eighteenth month is perhaps the commonest cause. 
 The dependence upon macaroni as the staple Italian diet 
 accounts for a good deal of it. 
 
 Diagnosis. The large, square head with overhanging 
 forehead and delayed closing of the f ontanelles ; enlarged 
 epiphyses of the long bones; the beading of the sternal 
 end of the ribs, so called rachitic rosary ; the prominent, 
 hard abdomen, and a tendency to draw up the legs, are 
 the main early symptoms of the disease. Later on, bow- 
 ing of the legs or knock knees develop. 
 
 Treatment. Improved hygiene, especially in regard 
 to diet, fruit juices, particularly orange, green vege- 
 tables, fresh milk, eggs, etc., is essential. Massage is a 
 yaluable adjunct of the treatment. Braces are usually
 
 CONGENITAL DEFECTS 93 
 
 needed and must be faithfully worn. Even in rather se- 
 vere types of bow leg one brace will often suffice. If not 
 it can be changed over or an additional brace made for 
 the other leg. Anterior and very severe lateral bowing 
 often call for surgical interference. A careful study of 
 the epiphyses by the X-ray is very essential in order to 
 determine the optimum time to operate when true bone 
 has just begun to be rapidly deposited. Knock knee as 
 well may call for surgical intervention guided by the 
 same principles. It must be emphasized that permanent 
 injury may be done to the knee joint rather early in 
 neglected cases and that, with each additional degree of 
 deviation from the normal line of weight transmission, 
 a very great amount of additional strain is thrown upon 
 the structures of the knee. 
 
 Coxa Vara. This is a decrease in the angle between 
 the surgical neck and the shaft of the femur with con- 
 sequent shortening of the affected leg and change in the 
 normal line of weight transmission. Its effect is similar 
 to but not usually as pronounced as that described as 
 resulting from congenital hip dislocations. It calls for 
 a long stilt brace on the affected leg to transmit the 
 weight of the body from the pelvis to the ground, the 
 weight of the leg giving some extension. The shoe on the 
 unaffected side should be built up. 
 
 Spastic Paralysis. Central motor neurone lesions most 
 often found in prolonged labor or instrumental delivery 
 result in spastic paralysis. The only immediate relief of 
 this condition is decompression, as performed with con- 
 giderable success by Dr. Sharpe of New York, but even
 
 94 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 under most favorable conditions a happy result is not 
 certain. The associated retardation of mental develop- 
 ment greatly complicates the problem of neuro-muscular 
 education. Treatment by effleurage and passive stretch- 
 ing should precede exercises for coordination and bal- 
 ance. To bring lasting results these must be extended 
 over a span of years. Every case can be improved and 
 should be a challenge to us to obtain the greatest improve- 
 ment possible, even when complete recovery is hopeless.
 
 Fig. 33. Carriage which Reduces Friction axd on a Smooth Surface 
 Allows Wide Range of Movement with Slight Effort. 
 
 
 Fig. 34. 
 
 Wire Cockup Splint for Wrist Drop, Light in Weight, and Re- 
 quires No Bandaging.
 
 Chapter VI 
 INFANTILE PARALYSIS 
 
 In infantile paralysis the lesion is a destructive one of 
 the anterior horn cells of the cord and the lower motor 
 neurones and almost always the resulting paralysis is 
 a flaccid one. The trophic nerves are likewise affected 
 and the part tends to decrease in bulk as well as in power. 
 During the active stage, and while ^ny tenderness per- 
 sists, the patient should be kept immobile. This is best 
 done by means of a cast or splint, but immediately there- 
 after for an extended period of time, daily treatment 
 consisting of massage, exercise, support and sometimes 
 heat, should be instituted. Massage should be mainly 
 fine, deep petrissage for stimulative effect. The operator 
 must be sure that he is getting direct action on the few 
 fibers that may remain alive under the usual thick coat- 
 ing of connective tissue and fat. 
 
 Exercises. In general, small and often repeated doses 
 bring the best results. Like the burning out of a weak 
 motor, lasting harm may be caused by overdoing. Many 
 devices for counter-weighting the limb have been used, 
 thereby giving the patient the early and stimulating ef- 
 fect of being able to move the limb actively. We have 
 used a small carriage, consisting of a grooved plat- 
 form mounted on casters and with a retaining strap. 
 
 97
 
 98 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 This is easily made, and by overcoming to a large degree 
 the friction of even a smooth table surface, will allow 
 great amplitude of active movement very early in the 
 treatment. 
 
 Let us consider as a typical case a paralyzed arm in 
 which the adductor muscle group is partially affected, the 
 abductors of the arm, especially the deltoid, the trapezius 
 and the supraspinatus have regained their strength but 
 slightly, the flexors and extensors of the elbow have very 
 little power remaining, and the muscles of the forearm 
 and hand are practically powerless. 
 
 The following three programs of exercise, preceded by 
 the application of massage and heat, are suggested as 
 giving, when used in rotation, a variety, which is of 
 value in retaining the patient's interest. 
 
 PROGRAM I 
 
 The patient sitting, affected side toward table, hand strapped 
 on carriage. 
 
 1. "Wide sweep of arm forward and backward. 
 
 2. Flexion and extension of the elbow to the side. 
 
 3. Wide sweep of arm with one or more attempts to stop and 
 start again at definite points. 
 
 4. Small hand circles, elbow free, done a few times in each 
 direction. 
 
 5. Flexion and extension of the elbow, fixed. 
 
 6. Patient leaning far forward, wide sweeps of the arm., 
 (The plane of the movement of the arm in relation to the body 
 is thus changed from horizontal to vertical and valuable help is 
 given in stretching the adductors.) 
 
 7. Forearm fixed, abduction and adduction of the wrist.
 
 INFANTILE PARALYSIS 99 
 
 8. Hand turned, ulnar side down, flexion and extension of 
 the wrist. 
 
 9, Patient prone on the table, wide sweep of the arm from 
 iide to side overhead. (On a narrow table use as wide a move- 
 ment as possible directly above the head.) 
 
 PBOGBAM n. FREE EXERCISES 
 
 Patient supine on the table. These exercises may be done 
 by the affected arm only, by both together or alternately. 
 Greater variety of neuro-muscular training may be secured by 
 these different combinations. 
 
 1. Raise arm fore upward, carry above head and return. 
 
 2. Place hand on hip and return. 
 
 3. Carry arm sideward up to head and return. 
 
 4. Carry arm across body to opposite side of waist and return. 
 
 5. Snap hand to shoulder and return, aided by lifting elbow 
 sideward if necessary. 
 
 6. Carry arm sideward, flex elbow, bringing hand to axilla, 
 straighten sideward and return, 
 
 7. Flex elbow, bringing hand to opposite shoulder and return. 
 
 8. Supinate and pronate the forearm. (In this position this 
 may be a shoulder exercise.) 
 
 9. Flex elbow to right angle, supported if necessary and 
 pronate. (This position eliminates shoulder assistance.) 
 
 10. Flex elbow, hand on neck to shorten leverage, extend 
 shoulder upward and return several times, return hand to side. 
 
 PROGRAM m. RESISTIVE EXERCISES 
 
 Fingers. 1. A well-fitting kid glove with small rings at the 
 finger tips, to which are attached very light weights by means 
 of strings, and used for flexion of fingers singly or together 
 with the hand supine, the strings running over a wrist roller
 
 100 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 or a row of spools. Pronate the hand for finger extension in 
 similar manner. 
 
 2. Finger flexion machine finger tread-mill. 
 
 Wrist. 1. Wrist roller. 
 
 2. Supination and pronation machine. 
 
 3. Abduction and adduction machine (McKenzie). 
 With overhead chest weights. 
 
 Elbow. 1. With hand encased in glove, if necessary, and at- 
 tached to overhead pulley handle, flex elbow. 
 
 2. With arm at side allow weights to flex elbow as far as 
 the control of the patient will allow, and extend downward. 
 
 Shoulder. 1. From extended arm, carry arm obliquely fore 
 downward. 
 
 2. From extended arm, carry arm side downward. 
 
 3. From extended arm, carry arm obliquely back downward. 
 
 4. Arm raised sideward at shoulder level, carry forward and 
 return, carry backward and return. 
 
 Without Chest Weights. Patient seated in chair, back to 
 operator. Operator places hands on tips of shoulders while 
 patient (1) pulls the shoulder forward, (2) lifts it up, (3) 
 pushes it backward. 
 
 Most of the above exercises can be worked out with 
 the shoulder or low chest weight, especially with the 
 patient lying supine, head toward the weights. The 
 overhead pulley, however, gives the additional advantage 
 of passive stretching of the stronger, and frequently 
 shortened, adductor groups. The other, and still more 
 common, result of infantile paralysis is a partially 
 paralyzed leg. We will take as our basis a leg in which 
 all the muscles of the thigh have a fair amount of power 
 present, the extensors of the foot are considerably weak- 
 ened, and the flexors are almost powerless.
 
 INFANTILE PARALYSIS 101 
 
 PROGRAM I 
 
 Patient lying supine. 
 
 1. a. Operator grasps the fore part of the foot with one hand, 
 the heel with the other and passively flexes the toes and the fore 
 part of the foot. 
 
 b. With the right hand grasping the fore part of the foot, 
 the thumb on the ball, the left hand grasping behind the heel, 
 the operator vigorously flexes the foot with an attempt at stretch- 
 ing the gastrocnemius and the calf muscles and, if necessary, 
 slightly assists the extension. "With the left hand working in 
 the opposite direction, he overcomes the patient's movement at 
 the hip, because, in attempting to extend the foot, the patient 
 will press down with the whole leg, and vice versa. 
 
 2. The operator, supporting under the knee with the right 
 hand, and the left under the ankle, is able to give any needed 
 amount of assistance to the extension of the leg. 
 
 3. Grasping behind the ankle and giving support over the 
 knee, if necessary, he assists the flexion of the hip with straight 
 leg. 
 
 4. From the same starting position abduction and adduction 
 are given, the operator carrying the weight of the leg. 
 
 5. Deep flexion of the thigh is done with the same assistance. 
 
 6. The carriage is placed under the ankle for active abduc- 
 tion and adduction. 
 
 Patient lying on affected side. 
 
 1. a. Place the affected ankle on carriage, knee fixed, for active 
 flexion and extension. 
 b. With knee bending, flex the thigh acutely. 
 Patient lying prone. 
 
 1. The knee is flexed at right angles and held by operator or 
 patient for rotation of the thigh. 
 
 2. Flexion and extension of the knee.
 
 102 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 3. Overextension of the thigh by backward and upward pull 
 of the operator. 
 
 4. Knee flexed, circling of the foot both ways, which is a 
 combination of 1 and 2. 
 
 There are various tread mills and extension weight 
 machines, which are of value. Machines for flexion, ex- 
 tension and circumduction of the ankle all have their 
 place, if available. 
 
 It is taken for granted that the operator will vary 
 and adjust his exercises exactly in relation to the 
 strength of each group of the patient's muscles, follow- 
 ing the general rule that the movements often have to 
 be entirely passive at first, with a slowly increasing 
 amount of assistance by the patient, and final develop- 
 ment into active or even resistive movement. Again I 
 would caution against too much work. An average of 
 four to eight repetitions of each exercise in the program 
 selected are sufficient for each treatment. 
 
 Support, especially a brace in the case of the leg, is 
 almost always essential and when needed should be worn 
 constantly. The deformities we fear, overextension of 
 the knee and drop foot, are generally the result of the 
 neglect of this needed support. Parents often need the 
 truth driven home to them that it is the brace which car- 
 ries the child, when to them it appears that the child is 
 lugging around a heavy extra weight. A late compli- 
 cation, coming from two to four or even six years after 
 the disease, is scoliosis, and this must be watched for 
 from time to time. Indeed, Doctors Hibbs, Farrell and
 
 INFANTILE PARALYSIS . 103 
 
 Humphries, from their work in the New York Orthopedic 
 Hospital, have come to the conclusion that infantile paral- 
 ysis is the most common single factor in the causation of 
 scoliosis. Late sequelae in unfavorable or neglected 
 cases may demand tenotomy or muscle transplantation, 
 but these operative procedures are not as early resorted 
 to as heretofore. They should only follow several years 
 of patient endeavor to secure the fullest results that 
 may be hoped for from exercise, and, if done, must in turn 
 be followed by reeducation. Recent rather brilliant re- 
 sults in apparently hopeless cases have been achieved 
 by baking for a considerable time in moderate tempera- 
 ture. One must avoid allowing the monotony of the work 
 to get one into a rut and to make one overlook the in- 
 dividual problem incident to each case. Nothing in our 
 field of work brings richer reward than patient, intelli- 
 gent work with this distressing condition. 
 
 Drop Wrist. This is another common type of paraly- 
 sis, which may follow fractures of the humerus, or lead 
 poisoning. It is the paralysis of the extensors of the 
 wrist and exercises as outlined above are applicable. 
 Splinting in extension must be maintained constantly. 
 
 NEBVE INJUBIES IN WAB 
 
 Injuries to the peripheral nerves are very common in 
 modem warfare because of the extensive lacerations of 
 the soft tissue caused by many types of projectiles. In 
 fact the high velocity bullet at mid-range and gas shells 
 are about the only missiles that do not make this kind of 
 wound. * * The Orthopedic Treatment of Gunshot In
 
 104 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 juries,'* by Leo Mayer, covers this field in a very satis- 
 factory manner. 
 
 Neurological examinations were made at the Field or 
 Evacuation Hospital when possible and splints supplied 
 if the injuries were extensive. It is important to re- 
 member that all wounds of the soft parts are now splinted 
 where practicable. I will attempt only briefly to out- 
 line the diagnosis and treatment of injuries of the most 
 common type. 
 
 Upper Extremity. 1. Brachial plexus injuries are oc- 
 casioned by axillary or supraclavicular wounds. 2. Cir- 
 cumflex. The teres minor and deltoid are affected, so 
 that full abduction of the arm is impossible. 3. Mus- 
 culocutaneous. Weakness of elbow flexion without areas 
 of anesthesia occur. 4. Musculospiral. This very com- 
 mon injury makes it impossible to extend the wrist or 
 thumb and the proximal phalanges of the fingers are also 
 affected. The distal phalanges can be extended, supina- 
 tion and the action of the triceps are weak, and small 
 areas of anesthesia may be present on the base of the 
 thumb. 5. Median. Flexion of the fingers and thumb is 
 absent and there is anesthesia over the first two fingers 
 and the outer half of the third. To test paralysis of 
 pronation have the elbow fixed. 6. Ulnar. Fourth and 
 fifth finger flexion is weak and there is inability to spread 
 the fingers to the normal extent. The fifth finger and the 
 inner side of the fourth is anesthetic. 
 
 Lower Extremity. 1. Sciatic. There is weakness of 
 knee flexors and complete paralysis of the foot with 
 nearly total anesthesia. 2. External popliteal. Dorsal
 
 INFANTILE PARALYSIS 105 
 
 flexion and eversion are absent and the dorsum of the 
 foot and toes is anesthetic. 3. Internal popliteal. Plan- 
 tar flexion is weak or absent with anesthesia of the sole 
 of the foot. 4. Musculocutaneous. Foot eversion is weak 
 and there is anesthesia over dorsum of foot. 5. Anterior 
 tibial. Dorsal flexion is absent with anesthesia of the 
 big toe and part of the second toe. 6. Posterior tibial. 
 Adduction is weakened and toe flexion is absent. 
 
 Treatment. Early treatment by splinting in such a 
 way as to relax the fibers of the affected muscles is essen- 
 tial. This general rule may be accepted in the case of 
 ulnar nerve injury because of the danger of contracture, 
 hence the fingers should be kept straight. Attempt to 
 bring the severed ends of the nerve into as close approxi- 
 mation as possible. Plaster, leather or metal may be 
 used for splinting. In injury to the musculospiral nerve 
 keep the hand extended. It is well to abduct the thumb 
 also. The proximal phalanges of the fingers must be 
 kept extended by the cockup splint.
 
 Chapter VII 
 THE SPINE DISEASES AND INJURIES 
 
 Anatomy. The spine is a flexible column made up 
 of a series of block-like bones, the vertebrae. There are 
 thirty-three in the entire column, seven neck or cervical, 
 twelve dorsal or thoracic, five lower back or lumbar 
 five fused together for the sacrum and four fused to 
 form the coccyx. In general, the vertebrsB consist of 
 two essential portions, the heavy solid body in the front 
 and the neural arch formed by the two pedicles and two 
 laminae, with their processes, two transverse, four articu- 
 lar and one spinous. The bone structure is more dense in 
 the neural arch than in the body. 
 
 The bodies, with their intervertebral, cartilaginous 
 pads are able to rotate slightly, one upon the other in 
 what more or less closely approximates the horizontal 
 plane. The articular processes, however, are placed in 
 an oblique plane, the superior backward and upward, the 
 inferior forward and downward in direction. With the 
 spine erect these articulations act as a check to rotation 
 between the bodies. The anterior common ligament, 
 binding the front of the bodies together, is not nearly as 
 strong as the combined interspinous and supraspinous 
 ligaments. There is a great difference in the mobility 
 of the various parts of the spine. We find the most mo- 
 
 106
 
 THE SPINE DISEASES AND INJURIES 107 
 
 bility between atlas and axis; flexion forward is least 
 in the dorsal, then cervical, most in lumbar; extension 
 backward, the same ; rotation is most in the cervical. 
 
 Tvhercvlosis of the Spine. ("Pott's disease.") The 
 spine is one of the most common regions at which the 
 tubercle bacillus attacks the bony skeleton. One or more 
 vertebrae may be involved either as a primary or a sec- 
 ondary focus of infection. The bodies of the vertebrae 
 are usually the parts first invaded. Points of lowered 
 resistance caused by trauma are often affected or such a 
 trauma may bring to light a slowly developing and here- 
 tofore unsuspected infection and cause its rapid spread. 
 The "cancellous nature of the bones permit early destruc- 
 tion with crushing in wherever the infection is exten- 
 sive. The collapse of the body of one or more vertebrae 
 makes more prominent the spinous process and forms 
 on the back the distinctive angular deformity known as 
 a gibbus. Complete paraplegia from pressure on the 
 cord may occur. Spinal caries is more frequently found 
 from the fourth to the fifteenth year. 
 
 Symptoms. Knowledge of tuberculosis in the patient 
 or his family should make us use extreme care to rule 
 out this condition in the presence of any obscure symp- 
 toms pointing to the back. Usually they are pain, pro- 
 tective spasm with resulting rigidity, angular deformity 
 and the general signs of a chronic infection, although in 
 early stages this may.not be present. Rigidity alone is 
 a symptom of great significance and sometimes a suflB- 
 cient basis for a positive diagnosis. The X-ray should al- 
 ways be used and will often confirm the diagnosis. It
 
 108 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 is of the utmost importance to differentiate this condi- 
 tion from scoliosis and kyphosis since the treatment for 
 tuberculons spine by exercise would do certain injury. 
 I have seen them exist together, with the postural defects 
 the more obvious. 
 
 Treatment. Pott's disease demands the same consti- 
 tutional treatment as tuberculous manifestations else- 
 where in the body. The local treatment consists in fixa- 
 tion and extension by means of cast, brace, stretcher 
 frame, or by the operative establishment of immobility, 
 secured by a bone graft from the tibia implanted into 
 the split spinous processes and extending one or two 
 vertebrae above and below the lesion as devised by 
 Albee of New York. Another successful method is that 
 of Hibbs, consisting in a partial resection and fusion of 
 the laminae. This operation has the advantage of mak- 
 ing but one incision and eliminates the slight promi- 
 nence of the bone graft. Where the lesion is in the 
 cervical section an extension of the brace or cast which 
 will lift up the head is necessary. For example, the 
 Taylor brace with head support (jury mast) is often 
 used. Grafts which prevent collapse have been suo- 
 cessfuly planted into the sacrum. A complication which 
 necessitates special attention is abscess formation. They 
 commonly follow the course of the psoas muscle, and 
 point in the inner side of the thigh, but are subject to a 
 wide variation and may point in almost any direction 
 from the seat of the lesion. Aspiration under aseptio 
 precautions is sometimes advisable. Sinuses already 
 formed should be injected with Beck's bismuth paste.
 
 THE SPINE DISEASES AND INJURIES 109 
 
 They should be carefully dressed to prevent mixed in- 
 fection and will usually clear up when proper measures 
 are instituted at the seat of the original lesion. 
 
 TRAUMATIC INJURIES 
 
 Strain and Sprain. Prolonged carrying of heavy 
 weights when the patient is not in proper condition may 
 lead to back strain. An example of this is the heavy 
 marching order on the part of the recruit not yet thor- 
 oughly hardened. Weight lifting in the stooping posture 
 is the common cause of lower back strains. Sudden 
 twisting or falls upon the back or the awkward landing 
 after jumping, may lead to quite severe sprains of any 
 of the various ligaments. 
 
 Treatment by means of heat, massage, rest, and sup- 
 port is indicated. 
 
 In sacro-iliac sprain the following strapping will be 
 found most serviceable: The patient lying prone, the 
 surgeon fixes the strap, which should be the full width of 
 the roller, 3 to 5 inches in front of the anterior superior 
 spine on the further side of the patient. The patient 
 then rolls slowly away from the surgeon, who applies 
 the strap tightly obliquely upward, ending just below the 
 twelfth rib of the opposite side. The procedure is then 
 repeated in the reverse direction, the two, broad, snugly 
 fitting straps crossing over the sacrum. They may be 
 reinforced by a short vertical strap of the same width 
 over the sacrum and one or two lumbar vertebrae. Most 
 corsets or belts which fasten in front aggravate the con-
 
 no ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 dition because their pull tends to open the saoro-iliao 
 joints. 
 
 Bruises. Bruises of the muscles and ligaments along 
 the spine show, beside the swelling and discoloration 
 which may be present, a localized tenderness on one side 
 of the spine. The spinous processes should not be tender 
 in this injury. 
 
 Fractures and Dislocations. Spinal fractures are rare. 
 
 Cervical Region. This region, because of its mobility, 
 is prone to dislocations, but fractures do occur. Slight 
 lesions only need treatment, as a fatal outcome is almost 
 certain in severe injury. Dislocation of the atlas an- 
 teriorly on the axis is sometimes seen. Slight displace- 
 ment, if associated with fracture of the odontoid process, 
 may not be fatal. In this lesion the short spine of the 
 ,axis may be palpated. The head is bent forward. Slight 
 lateral dislocation at this joint, or between the other 
 <jervical vertebrae, is not uncommon and gives no other 
 symptoms than slight pain and rigidity of the neck. 
 
 Treatment. After anesthesia, gentle hyperextension 
 maintained by a jury mast is necessary. In lateral dis- 
 placements tilt the head toward the opposite side, in- 
 creasing the deformity, but unlocking the facets; turn 
 the head toward the deformity to raise the caught facet 
 and then re-turn the head to a correct position. 
 
 The third, fourth, or fifth cervical vertebrae may be 
 fractured or partially dislocated by blows or falls on the 
 head. Such injuries are reduced as described, under 
 anesthesia, if required. When removal of the patient is 
 necessary in any of the above injuries some means of ex-
 
 THE SPINE DISEASES AND INJURIES 111 
 
 tension is essential. A temporary collar of folded stiff 
 paper, plaster or other stiff material will attain this re- 
 sult. 
 
 Dorsal Region. In the dorsal vertebrae the bodies or 
 laminae are seldom fractured except in fatal accidents. 
 The spinous processes, however, are subject to fracture. 
 The symptoms are sharp pain, crepitus, and abnormal 
 mobility on palpation of the spinous process. Extravasa- 
 tion of blood in the tissues may be noticed. Deviation 
 of a single spinous process, which may be gently pressed 
 back to its normal position, and the localization of pain 
 close to the skin are other prominent symptoms. The 
 examination should be supplemented and the diagnosis 
 confirmed by the X-ray. In the lower cervical and upper 
 dorsal regions a support transferring the weight to the 
 pelvis is efficient and permits of the patient getting about 
 fairly early. In lower dorsal injuries this complete re- 
 lief from weight bearing is difficult to attain. At least 
 two months in the recumbent position is required for 
 absolute safety. 
 
 Lumbar Region. The mobility of this region and the 
 fact that it is unprotected by bony structures, as the dor- 
 sal region is, subject it to injury. Dislocation is ex- 
 tremely rare and even in fracture of the bodies we do not 
 as a rule get marked displacement. Fatal outcome of 
 such injuries is rare since they are below the level of the 
 cord. Careful examination is required as it is easy td 
 overlook fracture in this region. Any change in the nor- 
 mal lumbar curve is suspicious. X-ray should be used 
 in diagnosis whenever possible. The appearance of lum-
 
 112 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 bar deformity, particularly backward displacement, re- 
 quires extension on the stretcher frame. As is the case 
 with lower dorsal fracture, it is impossible to completely 
 relieve weight bearing. Treatment in the horizontal po- 
 sition must be continued six to ten weeks. 
 
 Partial dislocation forward of the fifth lumbar verte- 
 bra on the sacrum is becoming increasingly common and 
 often follows relaxation of the sacro-lum bar ligament. 
 This is due to the abnormal obliquity of the pelvis, which 
 occurs in lordosis, and which is often associated with the 
 wearing of high heels. This is a common cause of back- 
 ache and it is most difficult to obtain fixation by means 
 of a brace. Treatment by orthopedic gymnastics is not 
 satisfactory since the required muscle leverage is lacking. 
 Fixation by bone graft is often the only permanent means 
 of cure. 
 
 Partial sacro-iliac dislocations may in like manner re- 
 quire bony fixation if the lesion is an advanced one. 
 Treatment of mild types of this condition have been de- 
 scribed under the topic of sprain. 
 
 Penetrating Wounds. Wounds by shrapnel, bayonets 
 and bullets are common in the spine. The bodies and the 
 sacrum do not splinter to any extent. From the spinous 
 process, pedicles or laminae splinters or chips of bone 
 may be driven into the cord. The occurrence of paraly- 
 sis, which by its type will aid in localizing the injury, 
 calls for operative interference. Use the X-ray for diag- 
 nosis and reduce probing to a minimum. Infected wounds 
 should be treated by Carrel or other approved methods 
 and the fixation should be prolonged.
 
 Chapteb Vlii 
 CURVATURE OF THE SPINE 
 
 Kyphosis. This is an abnormal increase in the dorsal 
 curve of the spine accompanied by a forward position of 
 the shoulders and head. With accompanied lordosis it 
 gives us a picture known as fatigue slump. There is a 
 type of rounded back, the appearance of which is due to 
 a heavy bed of muscle under and over the scapulae. The 
 pronounced development of the muscles beneath the 
 scapulae, but more especially of the supra- and infra- 
 spinatus, the rhomboids, the trapezius, teres major and 
 latissimus dorsi, found particularly in heavy-set athletes, 
 rounds out the back. This heavy type of muscle is often 
 found in weight-lifters, wrestlers, football players and 
 apparatus and gymnastic team men, and we find the same 
 heavy bed of muscles on the chest. The need for keeping 
 such a build in mind is apparent at once in considering 
 the relationship between this condition and corrective 
 gymnastics. Exercises would of course be superfluous, 
 since there is no weakness of the upper back groups and 
 no generalized weakness. 
 
 Obviously an incorrect posture of head and shoulders 
 is concomitant with this condition and when they do 
 occur together the emphasis should be laid simply on the 
 reeducation of the muscle sense to correct posture. As 
 
 113
 
 114 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 shown clearly in the studies made and charts worked out 
 by the American Posture League, the proper carriage 
 without exaggeration, of the head erect, the shoulders 
 back and the abdomen well retracted is that position 
 which throws the least strain upon those groups of mus- 
 cles whose action maintains the upright posture. With 
 each small increase in deviation from this normal pos- 
 ture we are subject to a very great increase in the effort 
 necessary to stand erect. There is, therefore, due to the 
 weakening effect of such unnatural effort, a tendency to 
 further slumping. For instance, this fatigue position 
 into which a person has fallen during the weakness of a 
 convalescence may of itself so increase the strain of 
 standing correctly as often to make it impossible for him 
 without special treatment to reassume his former normal 
 posture even after complete return to vigor. The con- 
 ditions once assumed tend to become habitual, and due 
 to a gradually modified muscle sense, may be absolutely 
 unconscious on the part of the patient. 
 
 The two great factors that determine the rapidity and 
 the amount of increase of any postural defect are the 
 strain to which the tissues of the body are subject and 
 their resistance to that strain as determined by their 
 state of health and development. In estimating the 
 amount of strain we have to consider duration in rela- 
 tion to periods of rest, as well as intensity and amount. 
 
 Causes. As indicated above, the causes of this type 
 of faulty posture fall naturally into two groups. First, 
 where the tissues of the body are weakened because of 
 too rapid growth, illness, faulty metabolism, impaired
 
 CURVATURE OF THE SPINE 115 
 
 mental development, overweight. Children handicapped 
 in any of these ways are affected quickly by undue strain 
 and we should never lose sight of the fact that the aver- 
 age burden may for them be too great. The second cause 
 is where normal children have too great a burden placed 
 upon them. Among the common strains to which child- 
 hood is subjected, habitually assumed faulty attitudes in 
 school, at home or at work are the most common. The 
 hanging of clothing from the shoulders where the weight 
 falls, as it usually does, far out towards the tips, is an- 
 other cause for slumping forward. Defects of vision and 
 hearing and excessive abdominal weight are also fre- 
 quent causes. 
 
 Symptoms. The earliest symptoms shown are for- 
 ward position of the head and the prominence of the 
 lower angles of the scapulae, followed later by a rolling 
 outward of their entire inner borders, with stretching of 
 the rhomboid groups and a forward position of the shoul- 
 der tips. Up to this point there may be no noticeable 
 involvement of the spine. This slight amount of stoop 
 is not included in kyphosis by some authors. Some col- 
 lege medical examiners, who do include this degree of 
 faulty posture under the term of kyphosis, have reported 
 from sixty to eighty per cent of their students as in this 
 class. The next degree involves the spine and it be- 
 comes increasingly difficult for the patient on command 
 to assume the normal posture. In fact, it is often alto- 
 gether impossible for him. There is a growing tendency 
 for the deformity to become fixed and the spine less flexi-
 
 116 OBTHOPEDICS 
 
 ble. A structural shortening of the pectoral group is 
 found in nearly all the marked cases. 
 
 Treatment. By this time the necessity for the early 
 institution of the proper treatment, before the condition 
 has progressed far in time or degree, must be evident 
 to the reader. Our problem is not a simple one. It in- 
 cludes, of course, the removal of the cause, if possible, if 
 it be of the type we have included under undue strain. 
 The general health of the patient must be built up and 
 especial emphasis laid upon this procedure where we 
 have determined the cause to be subnormal strength due 
 to any of the conditions mentioned in that group. ' Our 
 corrective exercises are aimed at the particular group 
 of muscles whose relaxed condition allows the faulty at- 
 titude, here largely the trapezius, rhomboids, supra- 
 spinatus, and the stretching out of their physiological op- 
 ponents, with their tendency to contracture, in this case 
 the pectoralis major and minor especially. 
 
 There is probably no type of deformity where the use 
 of braces is so much abused as in this case. It is well 
 to remind the reader again that it is only by proper use 
 that muscles grow strong, and if the back muscles are 
 weak and relaxed and the patient allows his shoulders to 
 be pulled forward by the stronger pectorals, a brace 
 would but make a bad matter worse. It would allow the 
 upper back muscles to relax completely and to perform 
 a very small proportion of their normal amount of work. 
 It is evident that it is their increased development and 
 not their relaxation which we desire. These same prin- 
 ciples apply to all braces for the correction of faulty pos-
 
 CURVATURE OF THE SPINE 117 
 
 ture. They are as a class not only useless but often do 
 great harm. Their only justifiable use is to prevent 
 tissue relaxation during some temporary weakness and 
 should then be coupled with definite effort to strengthen 
 the affected parts. 
 
 The special fault to be found with shoulder braces as 
 a class is that they exert their counter pressure against 
 the mobile lumbar spine and tend to produce lordosis. It 
 is not unusual for children wearing such braces to appear 
 at the dispensary with their shoulders held back but their 
 heads thrust forward and a very pronounced degree of 
 lordosis developed. 
 
 EXERCISES 
 
 1. Comer exercises. Child facing the comer of the room 
 about three feet in front of it places the hands, elbow high, 
 against the wall about a foot on either side of the corner and 
 the same distance below the shoulders. The body is lowered 
 forward by bending elbows, keeping the chin and abdomen re- 
 tracted, then pushed backward to straight arm. The teacher 
 standing behind resists the push by exerting counter pressure 
 with the hands between the scapulae. 
 
 2. Arm shoulder groups using three counts. 
 
 (a) 1. Arms forward raise. 2. Sharply sideward carry. 3. 
 Sideward lower keeping shoulders retracted. 
 
 (b) 1. Arms forward raise. 2. Arms sharply forward bend. 
 3. Sideward lower keeping shoulders firmly back. 
 
 (c) 1. Arms forward raise. 2. Obliquely side upward raise. 
 3. Sideward lower. 
 
 3. Knee bending at stall bars. Patient stands back to stall 
 bars, grasps behind shoulders, then keeping head, shoulders and 
 hips against the bars, does deep knee bend.
 
 118 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 4. Hand suspension spine twisting. 
 
 5. Pectoral stretching supine on plinth or narrow bench, 
 neck firm, counter pressure downward on elbows. 
 
 6. Swimming arms forward bend, lower trunk forward, carrj 
 arms fore upward and slowly side downward in imitation of 
 breast stroke. 
 
 7. Hand suspension with counter pressure between shoulder 
 blades. 
 
 8. Arm rotation outward, forcing shoulders back. 
 
 9. Patient sitting on chair or bench, with neck firm. Teacher 
 stands behind, knee, padded if necessary, between shoulder 
 blades, grasps shoulders or upper arm, fingers in front, thumbs 
 in back and passively stretches the pectorals. 
 
 10. Mirror ^for reeducation of muscle sense with the aid of 
 sight to proper posture. 
 
 11. Floor hang forward. Patient stands in back of slanting 
 ladder grasping round, shoulder high, arms length in front. 
 "Without moving feet body sways forward. 
 
 12. Wands. Raise arms upward in line with shoulders. 
 Marching head erect with wand behind shoulders. Thrusting 
 upward, lowering behind shoulders, trunk lowering forward. 
 
 Exercises 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 11, and 12 are given particularly 
 for the strengthening of the dorsal muscles. 
 
 Exercises 3, 5, 9 and 11 aim at the stretching of the 
 pectoral muscles. 
 
 For attaining general flexibility, exercise 4 is espe- 
 cially valuable. 
 
 Exercises 6 and 11 should not be used in cases where 
 lordosis also occurs, as their action would tend to in- 
 crease the lumbar curve. 
 
 The mirror is of particular value in training muscle
 
 CURVATURE OF THE SPINE 119 
 
 sense which must be reeducated before the patient will 
 be able to retain a correct posture. 
 
 Whether or not all these exercises, which should be 
 done four times each, are included in an ideal program, 
 it must be remembered that in the development of tone 
 and reeducation of muscle sense bodily tone must be 
 raised, the weakened groups of muscles must be exer- 
 cised, the contracted muscles must be stretched and gen- 
 eral flexibility must be attained so that definite exercises 
 for each of these aims must be included in every pro- 
 gram. 
 
 Lordosis. Lordosis is an abnormal curve forward in 
 the lumbar spine. 
 
 Occurrence. Slight degrees of lordosis are extremely 
 common, but such an amount as will call for treatment is 
 rather rare. 
 
 Causes. All the etiological factors mentioned for 
 kyphosis may be secondary causes of this condition since 
 lordosis often is secondary to and compensating for 
 kyphosis. Such compensation is necessary for the rea- 
 son that, with the head and shoulders forward, the center 
 of weight transmission would fall too far forward in the 
 lumbar region. The spine, therefore, adjusts itself by 
 increasing the lumbar curve so as to reestablish the 
 transmission of weight in the normal plane. 
 
 Among the primary causes are : 1. High heels, which 
 increase the inclination of the pelvis, thereby tilting for- 
 ward the lower lumbar vertebrae also and making an 
 increased curve necessary. 2. Excessive abdominal 
 weight such as the deposition of a large amount of fat 
 
 \
 
 120 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 in the abdominal wall. Pregnancy may be a temporary 
 factor. Poor or exaggerated posture may also bring 
 about this condition. 
 
 Sequeke. The superincumbent weight of the body, 
 the greater part of which is borne by the lumbar verte- 
 brae, tends greatly to increase this condition when once 
 it has been established. In addition the increased in- 
 clination of the pelvis changes a section of the lower 
 front abdominal wall from being merely a retaining wall 
 to a weight bearing floor of the abdominal cavity. The 
 abdominal contents tend to follow the relaxed wall and 
 their ligaments exert an increased pull forward and 
 downward upon the lumbar spine. This condition in two 
 ways again exemplifies the fact that a structural de- 
 formity once established tends to increase in degree. 
 
 Treatment. Braces are useless unless they take their 
 fixation on the more immovable lower dorsal vertebrae 
 and sacrum and are coupled with exercise. If the cause 
 is indirectly due to kyphosis, that condition should be 
 treated at the same time. General conditioning to re- 
 move the abdominal weight must be undertaken and the 
 heels should be lowered when these evils are a part 
 of the cause. 
 
 EXERCISES 
 
 1. Long sitting. (Legs extended forward on table or floor, 
 knees straight.) Hold several minutes. 
 
 2. Supine lying. 
 
 (a) Alternate knee bending upward. 
 
 (b) Alternate leg raising forward.
 
 CURVATURE OF THE SPINE 121 
 
 (c) Stride seat on plinth or narrow bench. Raise wands 
 fore upward overhead and raise legs to long 
 sitting position, lowering wand behind shoul- 
 ders and return to starting position. 
 
 3. Hand suspension. 
 Alternate knee raising. 
 
 4. Long sitting. 
 
 Arms thrusting upward against counter-pressure. 
 
 5. Hand suspension with both knee raising. Later both leg 
 raising, knees straight. 
 
 6. Supine lying, feet fixed sitting up and returning to lying. 
 
 This last exercise can be made increasingly severe accord- 
 ing to the arm position. It is the easiest by extending arms 
 over head and flinging them sharply with raising of the body. 
 Next, with arms beside the body, then extended sideward or 
 folded, and hardest, with arms extended over head without fling- 
 ing with the body raising. 
 
 7. Supine lying. 
 
 (a) Bend both knees upward. 
 
 (b) Raise both legs upward. 
 
 (c) Flex and extend knees alternately in imitation of 
 
 bicycle pedaling. 
 
 8. Long sitting retain several minutes. 
 
 Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4 and 8 stretch the erector spinae 
 muscles. 
 
 The others strengthen the abdominal group of mus- 
 cles, the object of which is to bring the sternum and the 
 pubis closer together, decreasing the inclination of the 
 pelvis. 
 
 Scoliosis Rotary Lateral Curvature. One author has 
 stated that ''lateral curvature is the most diflficult and 
 subtle part of orthopedic surgery," and a survey of the
 
 122 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 literature would certainly seem to confirm this state- 
 ment. It is especially confused in regard to the causes 
 of rotation and the direction in which it takes place. 
 
 A good deal of valuable research on this subject has 
 been done by Lovett of Boston, Young of Philadelphia, 
 and others. Lovett especially, in his excellent book, 
 "Lateral Curvature of the Spine and Round Shoulders," 
 devotes several chapters to the working out of the prob- 
 lem of rotation on the living model and the cadaver. He 
 bases his conclusions, that the bodies rotate toward the 
 concavity on his experiments in functional lateral trunk 
 bending on the part of the model and on the torso of the 
 cadaver, and assumes that this applies equally to func- 
 tional lateral curvature. He also states in common with 
 other authors, that the apparent curve as shown by the 
 marked spines is no index of the latitude of deviation that 
 may be present in the bodies that the apparent curve 
 may be less than the real curve. Most investigators be- 
 lieve that the rotation is a torsion or twisting due to 
 superincumbent weight. Following the law that where 
 those in the center of a column of block-like bodies are 
 displaced so that the center of gravity falls nearer the 
 periphery of some and weight or pressure is exerted on 
 this column, those blocks displaced will twist upon their 
 vertical axis, the amount of turning being in proportion 
 to the amount of displacement. That the spine follows 
 this rule is conclusively demonstrated by Young in his 
 text-book. The bodies of the vertebras rotate toward the 
 convexity of the curve, turning the spines back toward
 
 CURVATURE OF THE SPINE 123 
 
 the mid line, thus making the apparent curve less than the 
 real curve. 
 
 Many orthopedists believe that the structural curves 
 are always associated with softening of bone, and that 
 normal tissue may not be deformed. Recent operative 
 procedures for the correction of scoliosis demonstrate 
 that the bodies of the vertebrae rotate toward the con- 
 vexity, as I have stated, and that bone deformity, espe- 
 cially wedge shaped vertebraB, is not by any means al- 
 ways found in rigid curves, but that these curves may 
 readily be straightened out, once the muscles have been 
 dissected away and that they are entirely responsible for 
 the apparently fixed condition of the curve. This is a 
 still further confirmation of the fact already stated that 
 muscles, which are given slack, tend slowly but surely to 
 a definite structural shortening, that may become ex- 
 tremely resistant to corrective measures. 
 
 Occurrence. Percentages given for this defect differ 
 widely, and the acceptance of very slight degrees of 
 scoliosis depends largely on the personal equation of the 
 examiner. Seventeen per cent for girls, ten per cent for 
 boys is probably a conservative estimate of the preva- 
 lence of this condition. 
 
 Classification. From the standpoint of the condition 
 of the tissues involved scoliosis may be divided into func- 
 tional, postural and flexible, and into rigid, fixed, struc- 
 tural or organic. From the standpoint of the appearance 
 of the curve, or curves, we differentiate the single, sim- 
 ple, total or "C shaped curves from the compound, 
 double (sometimes triple) or **S'* shaped curves. The
 
 124 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 above classifications are not interchangeable for, while it 
 is perfectly true that most curves in the beginning are 
 both single and flexible, single curves may become fixed, 
 or double curves remain flexible. 
 
 Causes. It has been stated that ''school-rooms are 
 factories of scoliosis." An exact knowledge of the me- 
 chanics of proper school sitting is necessary if we are 
 to decrease this defect. The following requirements 
 have been found most satisfactory: (a) Height of seat; 
 feet should rest lightly on the floor, knees bent at right 
 angles, (b) Seat should slope slightly back, three-eighths 
 of an inch, (c) The length of the seat should be two- 
 thirds the length of the thigh, (d) The width should be 
 at least that of the hips, (e) The back should slope back- 
 ward about one inch in twelve from the vertical, (f) 
 The edge of the desk should be in a straight line over 
 the edge of the chair, (g) The height should be such 
 that the forearm rests easily with elbows at right angles, 
 (h) The desk should slope back from 10 to 15 degrees; 
 30 degrees would be best for seeing, but the books would 
 slide at this angle, (i) Pupils should sit back from the 
 desk so that about two-thirds of the forearm rests on 
 it. 
 
 The large easy chair, often set aside for the family's 
 young hopeful, in which, because of its size, he is able to 
 curl up and readily forms a postural habit, which con- 
 tinued through the years may markedly affect the spine, 
 is also a cause to be considered. The habitual carrying 
 of all burdens on one side, for example, newspaper bags, 
 bundles of school books, hods of coal, etc., is another
 
 CURVATURE OF THE SPINE 127 
 
 common cause. It is remarkable how soon children form 
 a habit of carrying a given burden in the same way, and 
 many of them are continuously carried for a number of 
 years. Shortness of one leg is a frequent cause. The 
 careful following up of the 1916 infantile paralysis cases 
 and careful comparison with earlier epidemics has led 
 many orthopedic surgeons to the conclusions that this 
 disease is among the very common causes for scoliosis, 
 the pull of the muscles on the less affected side being re- 
 sponsible. 
 
 Diagnosis. The main reliance is placed on the five fol- 
 lowing symptoms: 1. Unequal distances of the inner 
 border of the scapulas from the spine; it is less on the 
 convex side in a dorsal curve. 2. The rhomboid shaped 
 space between the arm and the body, sometimes called 
 the arm waist angle, is less on the side of the curve. 3^ 
 Uneven hips and shoulders ; the shoulder tends to be high 
 on the side of the dorsal curve. The hip on the side of 
 the curve in the lumbar region is made prominent. This 
 is often mistakenly called a high hip. 4. The marked 
 spines show the direction but not the degree to which 
 the vertebras are involved. 5. Prominence of one side of 
 the back is brought out by trunk bending forward, the 
 arms hanging loosely and evenly, the Adams' position. 
 Convexity caused by the prominence of the ribs is on the 
 side of the curve in whatever region it may be, but it is 
 less apparent in the lumbar region. On this sign alone 
 diagnosis of functional curvature is justifiable. 
 
 Treatment. Preventative treatment consists in the 
 study and proper regulation of all habitual postures,
 
 128 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 keeping in mind how early such habits are fixed, and the 
 importance of attacking the problem before faulty atti- 
 tude is established Postural habits are corrected by fol- 
 lowing the rules which apply to the overcoming of any 
 other habit, physical, mental, or moral. Briefly they are : 
 1. To create a clear cut picture in the child's mind of the 
 correct posture from which he habitually deviates in 
 work, rest or play with reasons if necessary. 2. Punish- 
 ment, if necessary, should follow immediately and should 
 logically fit the misdemeanor. Here, then, it should be 
 postural in type and, if possible, over-corrective in char- 
 acter. For instance, a child with a left total curvature, 
 who is told to carry weights on the left side and has been 
 given the reasons, is discovered carrying a weight on the 
 wrong side. He should be made at once and under super- 
 vision to do some work carrying the weight on the proper 
 side. 3. Allow no exceptions to occur. Relatives, teacher, 
 physical director, etc., should all cooperate to see to it 
 that the child is reminded of every single slip. Patience, 
 long continued, may prevent serious deformity. Proper 
 food and rest are all-important for the normal ossifica- 
 tion of the bones and defects of vision and hearing or the 
 shortness of one leg, or any other contributing cause 
 should be remedied. 
 
 Not only will general strength and development help 
 somewhat in postponing the onset of a scoliosis, but they 
 are elements of the tissue resistance which delays the 
 stage of structural deformity of the muscles. Local 
 treatment consists of casts or braces and exercises. 
 
 Operations. Bone fusions or graft operations, which
 
 CURVATURE OF THE SPINE 129 
 
 have recently been done with what gives promise of be- 
 ing most brilliant results in selected cases, leave the pa- 
 tient with a stiffened but straight spine in the affected 
 region. This rigidity is not especially an undesirable 
 feature since these curves are all quite rigid in their 
 deformed position. 
 
 Casts. Casts may be permanent or removable. Great- 
 er correction and counter pressure is obtained by the 
 permanent cast, worn usually for about three months. 
 During this time the spine tends to increase its rigidity, 
 musculature is weakened and the general health often 
 slightly impaired. The removable type gives some sup- 
 port, allows an opportunity for exercising, but cannot be 
 applied to give as great correction. Casts may be put on 
 in the sitting, standing, lying or suspended posture. 
 When adjusted to the patient lying supine one of two 
 methods is employed. First, that advocated by Abbott, 
 Adams, Lovett, and Bradford with the spine flexed, and 
 second, the method advocated by Whitman, Schultess and 
 Bucholz with the spine in hyperextension. That two 
 exactly opposite positions of the spine should be used 
 with rather satisfactory results in both cases seems at 
 first difficult to explain. The principles involved are 
 these : The Abbott method aims at unlocking the articular 
 facets, thereby unlocking the vertebrae and making re- 
 rotation possible. Since the first effect of such unlocking 
 of the articulations is to increase the rotation, the ap- 
 parent curve is of course less, and this fact has misled 
 some men into thinking that the spine is actually straight 
 in this position. It must be remembered that a consid-
 
 130 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 erable amount of the correction or overcorrection force 
 obtained by this method must be expended on merely re- 
 rotating the vertebrae to their former position before 
 any net gain can be secured. 
 
 The other method, that of hyperextension, aims at re- 
 lieving the weight bearing rotary strain upon the bodies 
 by shifting it backward upon the posterior part of the 
 vertebral column. This position of course would greatly 
 aid in the rerotation of the vertebra bodies, but neces- 
 sarily more tightly locks the articular processes, which 
 in itself prevents rotation. So that any corrective effect 
 must act on the column as a whole. It is, not yet certain 
 which is the better way. The rather brilliant results re- 
 ported by Abbott have not as a rule been obtained by 
 those imitating him. 
 
 The postural type of scoliosis very seldom requires a 
 cast. In fact, where constant exercise under supervision 
 is available there is a tendency now to depend more than 
 ever on active exercise. In any case a period of exercise 
 for the improvement of muscle tone and greater flexi- 
 bility should be interposed between the casts. 
 
 Various types of braces and corsets widely advertised 
 usually do more harm than good. Successful treatment 
 of scoliosis is not accomplished by the mail order plan. 
 
 In all cases with marked softness of bone and those of 
 rapid development, casts should always be used. In situ- 
 ations where exercises under good supervision are not 
 available main reliance must be placed on casts. 
 
 Exercises. Various corrective positions, using the 
 body weight to secure counter pressure, on various types
 
 CURVATURE OF THE SPINE 131 
 
 of archaic apparatus now collecting dust in the attics of 
 many orthopedic institutions were formerly greatly re- 
 lied upon. A glance through the older text-books will 
 reveal the wide variety of this type of armamentarium. 
 Active exercise on simple apparatus supplemented by 
 counter pressure on the part of the operator is now used 
 almost exclusively. 
 
 PROGRAMS OF EXERCISIS 
 I 
 
 Left Total Curve. 
 
 1. Comer exercise. Technic as described 
 for kyphosis except counter pressure by 
 operator with left hand on the greatest con- 
 vexity on the left side and enough on the 
 right hip to prevent the patient twisting 
 to the right. 
 
 2. Stretch walk with self correction. 
 Self correction must be worked out in each 
 individual case. Here it would be with the 
 right arm stretched up, hand resting 
 lightly on the head, left palm pressing 
 against the side as high and as far back as the patient can place 
 it, the patient walking a few steps usually on the toes with active 
 attempt to stretch the spine. Frequent periods of relaxation and 
 short periods of intense effort should be insisted upon. 
 
 3. Hand suspension, spine twisting. Hanging on horizontal 
 bar or rings and twisting as far as possible right and left. 
 
 4. Trunk bending left, hips fixed, self correction as above. 
 
 5. Mirror. Reeducate muscle sense through the eye. Assist 
 patient to assume his best possible posture. Have him walk 
 around the room, return to mirror and correct any slump that 
 has occurred.
 
 132 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 6. Hanging by right arm, back to stall bar or slanting ladder^ 
 left heel supported, right leg hanging, 
 
 7. Trunk forward bending or lowering, hips fixed, and rais- 
 ing against counter pressure as in 1. 
 
 8. Spring sitting. Sitting on right side of stool body in- 
 clined forward, right arm reaching actively toward wall or 
 stall bars, right leg stretched backward. Work arm and leg 
 toward the left, actively stretching the right side. Retain about 
 half a minute. 
 
 9. Hand suspension, counter pressure. Hang from rings or 
 bar, operator pushing patient forward, counter pressure as in 1. 
 
 10. Prone lying, feet strapped, trunk raising backward, self 
 correction as in 2. 
 
 11. Stretching for head plate. 
 
 12. Floor hang, legs left. Patient grasps horizontal bar, stall 
 bar or rings about shoulder high and hangs down to straight 
 arm with the feet well out to the left. 
 
 13. Stretch walk, balancing weight on the head. 
 
 14. Supine hook lying spine stretching. Patient on table, 
 right knee over the end, the right arm extended upward and 
 grasped by the operator who stretches the right side. 
 
 15. Creeping in a circle to the left, reaching well forward 
 with the right arm. 
 
 16. Prone leg lying, trunk raising. Patient lying prone with 
 waist at end of table, feet fixed, trunk flexed over end of table 
 and raised upward to fullest possible extension, self correction 
 as in 2. A severe type of exercise for later progression. 
 
 17. Sayre suspension. The addition of hip harness to fix 
 pelvis, patient on stool, is very efficacious. 
 
 18. Strap table pelvis and shoulders fixed to the left, one 
 or two central straps fixed to the right, running over the back, 
 under the body, from which end traction is exerted toward the 
 right and the straps fixed maintain ten minutes. 
 
 A selection of eight or ten out of the above group, being
 
 CURVATURE OF THE SPINE 133 
 
 sure to pick at least two of each group and reserving the others 
 for the varying of the program later, would be sufficient. 
 
 We must stretch the muscles on the concave side. This is 
 done by exercises 2, 4, 6, 8, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16. 
 
 To increase flexibility exercises, 3, 13, and 16 are good. 
 
 Bilateral strengthening of the back is accomplished by ex- 
 ercises 1, 10, and 16. 
 
 Rerotation by counter pressure. Pressure on the convexity, 
 on the ribs is transmitted to the side of the vertebral body and 
 rerotates it. All the exercises in which counter pressure is 
 used, exercises 1, 7, 9, and 18 do this. 
 
 Reeducation of muscle sense employs particularly exercises 
 2, 5, and 13. Note. Reverse each position for right total curve. 
 
 Right Dorsal Left Lumbar Curve. 
 
 1. Comer counter pressure on right dorsal, left lumbar con- 
 vexities. 
 
 2. Stretch walk with self correction. Right hand on pos- 
 terior axilla, left at the waist line. 
 
 3. Hand suspension, spine twisting. 
 
 4. Trunk bending sideward toward principal curve. 
 
 5. Mirror. 
 
 6. Hanging by left arm at stall bar or slanting ladder, left 
 heel supported, right leg hanging. 
 
 7. Trunk lowering forward, counter pressure as in 1. 
 
 8. Spring sitting, left arm up, right leg back. 
 
 9. Prone lying, feet strapped, trunk raising backward, self 
 correction as in 2. 
 
 10. Stretching for head plate. 
 
 11. Stretch walk, balance weight on head. 
 
 12. Supine hook lying, spine stretching, right leg over end of 
 table, traction on left arm.
 
 134 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 13. Prone leg lying, trunk raising, self correction as in 2. 
 
 14. Creeping with left arm leading as much as possible and 
 slightly -dragging the right leg, wide movements of shoulders and 
 pelvis giving some correction and increased mobility. 
 
 15. Sayre's suspension. 
 
 16. Strap table ^shoulders fixed to the right, hips to the left, 
 dorsal strap pulled and fixed to the left from below, lumbar 
 strap pulled and fixed to the right from below. 
 
 To increase flexibility 3, 11, 14. 
 
 Bilateral strengthening 1, 9, 13, 15. 
 
 Rerotation by 1, 7, 8, 16. 
 
 Reeducation 2, 5, 11. 
 
 Note. Reverse all positions for left dorsal right lumbar curve. 
 
 In both the above programs there should be progression in 
 the severity of the exercises selected and the number of repe- 
 titions which might be increased or varied from four to ten.
 
 Chaptbb IX 
 JOINT INJURIES AND ARTHRITIS 
 
 'Anatomy. Joints are formed by the approximation of 
 two or more bones, whose surfaces are usually covered 
 with articular cartilage, then with synovial membrane, 
 moistened and lubricated in the healthy state by synovial 
 fluid. In most movable joints, surrounding these struc- 
 tures is a sleeve-like capsular ligament, reinforced in cer- 
 tain portions where the strain is greatest. Closely asso- 
 ciated with many joints and relieving the friction of 
 tendons upon each other and the bone, are found closed, 
 membranous sacks called bursae, which are partially 
 filled with synovial fluid. The crucial ligaments of the 
 knee and ligamentum teres of the hip directly bind the 
 bones together. Any or all of these structures may be 
 acutely or chronically injured by trauma, toxins, or di- 
 rect bacterial action. A common type of trauma is slight 
 and long continued faulty posture. 
 
 Classification. Joints are classified as immovable and 
 movable, which include sliding, hinge, pivotal, saddle, 
 condyloid and ball and socket. With the first, as exem- 
 plified by the sutures of the skull, we are not here con- 
 cerned. 
 
 Sprains and Dislocations Traumatic Lesions. A 
 ftraijLis often described as the result of the application 
 
 135
 
 136 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 of force, abnormal in degree or direction, which does not 
 result in an anatomical lesion of any of the structures of 
 the joint. It would, therefore, at most, but temporarily 
 weaken the function of the joint, and would be treated, if 
 necessary, by the means to be described under sprain. 
 \^ A s prai n is a partial but immediately replaced disloca- 
 J tion, during the process of which, however brief in time, 
 there is an actual tearing or other injury to the tissues 
 ^ making up the joint. ^ Tha symptoms are those of strain, 
 but considerably aggravated, and include pain, swelling, 
 sometimes slight hemorrhage and more or less limitation 
 of function. The swelling is usually that of increased 
 synovial fluid and lymph within the joint, bursas or sur- 
 rounding tissues, nature's object being to cushion the 
 injured tissues with a water jacket and so to prevent 
 further injury. Four undesirable results may follow here 
 and demand our attention. First, an excess of fluid with- 
 in the joint, as in the case of the knee, may so force the 
 bones apart as to make them unstable in a direction in 
 which, in the normal state, because of the bone forma- 
 tion, they are not apt to slip. In the joint named, the 
 tendency to lateral instability is the case in point. Sec- 
 ond, a large increase of fluid within the bursas or tissues 
 may make these supports of the joint boggy and unse- 
 cure. When the fluid is finally absorbed the ligaments 
 tend to remain relaxed, as a result of long continued 
 stretching. Third, there is a tendency, particularly in 
 an unused joint, for this fluid to become gummy and 
 gelatinous. This may lead to the formation of more solid 
 bodies, the so-called rice kernels, within the joint. The
 
 JOINT INJURIES AND ARTHRITIS 137 
 
 frequent reinjury, which so often accompanies untreated 
 cases, with retarded recovery, may lead to a thickened, 
 doughy synovial membrane, which, equally with the 
 coagulated bodies just mentioned, may mechanically in- 
 terfere with the normal range of movement, most com- 
 __j]aaaly^f ound in the knee. 
 
 Finally, comes the formation of scar tissue or even 
 bone ankylosis by reinjury. This reinjury is most apt 
 to occur during the healing process unless, while under- 
 going repair, the tissue is protected from any movement 
 or position simulating that which brought about the orig- 
 inal lesion. 
 
 In regard to dislocations, generalizations only are here 
 in order. For detail in regard to each of the possible 
 dislocations of the various joints the reader is referred 
 to the section on fractures and dislocations and to the 
 excellent texts of Cotton, Stimson, Preston, Jones and 
 others. 
 
 Dislocation is a complete, temporary or permanent 
 change in the relationship of the bones comprising the 
 joint. The surrounding ligaments are always torn. 
 Often through the rent one or more of the bones ap- 
 pear. 
 
 Diagnosis. Where the bony landmarks are all in nor- 
 mal positions, where the swelling and tenderness are on 
 one side of a joint, and where gentle manipulation can 
 be performed throughout nearly its normal range and 
 direction but a given movement elicits more pain than 
 other movements, in that joint we may assume that we 
 are dealing with a sprain. 

 
 138 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 Where there is malposition of the bony landmarks, 
 considerable swelling, only a moderate amount of hem- 
 orrhage, where the pain is diffused about the joint and 
 the movement greatly limited in amount or direction, 
 the probabilities are that we have a dislocation. 
 
 Where the greatest pain is localized above or below the 
 joint, the hemorrhage marked, the bony landmarks 
 changed in their relations and, except in impacted cases, 
 the motion increased and not in the joint, a diagnosis of 
 fracture is justifiable. When there is probability of the 
 presence of either dislocation or fracture, the X-ray 
 should always be resorted to if possible. 
 
 Treatment. With a clear-cut impression of the se- 
 riou"s"consequences that may follow untreated cases of 
 sprain, it is yet just as important to remember that many 
 patients suffer from overtreatment, or, better, over- 
 protection, because the fundamental and best of all types 
 of treatment, within reasonable limits, is use. This is 
 shown by the fact that animals use lightly but constantly 
 such an injured joint, and the rapidity with which it 
 usually heals is enlightening. Hemorrhage in this type 
 of injury, though usually slight, must be considered. 
 When internal bleeding has ceased, the use of the joint, 
 where hemorrhage had occurred, is desired. It will aid 
 in preventicg the clotting of blood in the tissues and in 
 quickening its absorption. Use must be differentiated 
 from overuse or resprain, and can be attained best by 
 means of light or partial support, or complete preven- 
 tion from movement in an undesired direction or degree. 
 To cite again the knee joint, this might be accomplished
 
 JOINT INJURIES AND ARTHRITIS 139 
 
 by the use of a simple hinge brace, locked against over- 
 extension and preventing any twisting or lateral devia- 
 tion. In the ankle the common injury to the external 
 lateral ligament can be properly supported by reversing 
 a flat foot strapping, omitting the plantar straps, and 
 weaving in a few cross straps. If seen at once an ap- 
 plication of cold generally prevents excessive swelling. 
 In all the many and valued uses for the various types of 
 baking there is none in which the results are more grati- 
 fying than in its application to these cases. Massage 
 is also of great value and should, if possible, be used in 
 combination with baking. 
 
 Dislocations are reset at once and treated as severer 
 sprains with emphasis on fixation and protection. In dis- 
 locations or injuries involving severe tears of tissue the 
 tendency to increase the amount of adhesion must be 
 carefully guarded against. Too early and too violent 
 movement of the joint will tear through the new formed 
 tissue, increase the inflammation and the amount of 
 fibrous exudate. Pain is our main guide. It is safe to 
 move the joint slowly as far as we can without eliciting 
 severe pain. Massage is of great help in increasing cir- 
 culation. Passive movements should be limited to moving 
 the joint once through its greatest range unchecked by 
 pain and protective spasm. If it is necessary a little 
 later the joint may be moved once through its entire 
 range under anesthesia to break adhesions. 
 
 Arthritis. Traumatic lesions of the joints are de- 
 scribed under sprains and dislocations and we are here 
 concerned with infective and toxic arthritis.
 
 140 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 Toxic Arthritis. The common diseases which often 
 manifest themselves in joint inflammations are acute 
 articular rheumatism, tuberculosis, gonorrhea and syphi- 
 lis. Inflammations of joint tissues, due to the absorption 
 of toxins from more or less distant foci, are from pyor- 
 rhea or abscesses around the teeth, infected tonsils, faulty 
 digestion or insufficient intestinal or kidney elimination. 
 
 Acute rheumatic arthritis or rheumatic fever in the 
 acute and severe stage cannot be treated by orthopedic 
 measures other than support, but in the mild or chronic 
 stage can be dealt with in the same manner as arthritis 
 in general. 
 
 Tuberculous arthritis is treated first constitutionally 
 following the approved methods employed for arresting 
 any tuberculous process in the body rest, outdoor living 
 and forced feeding. Locally, by means of brace, exten- 
 sion or rest in bed, we attempt to immobilize a joint and 
 remove all weight bearing from it. 
 
 Arthritis Deformans, Osteoarthritis, Rheumatoid 
 Arthritis, Rheumatic Gout. Degenerative and Prolifera^ 
 tive Arthritis. Whitman * of New York, in his treatise 
 on orthopedic surgery, has given us perhaps the best brief 
 description of this group of conditions. He says, ** Under 
 these titles are included a group of chronic diseases of 
 the joints whose etiology is obscure. At the present 
 time, as these diseases are often classed as varying 
 manifestations of one pathological process, the titles are 
 usually considered as synonymous." 
 
 This group of chronic affections of the joints are of 
 
 'Orthopedic Surgery." Eoyal Whitman (Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia). 
 
 m
 
 JOINT INJURIES AND ARTHRITIS 141 
 
 uncertain origin, derangements of the nervous system 
 probably accounting for a considerable portion of them 
 and, when present, are associated with marked deteriora- 
 tion of the skin appendages, the hair, nails, etc. 
 
 Clinically, we have two rather sharply defined types, 
 hypertrophic and atrophic arthritis. 
 
 Hypertrophic arthritis occurs from early adult life 
 through old age. It is often confined to one or more 
 large joints but associated enlargement of the joints 
 of the fingers is common. The synovial membranes, 
 cartilages and periarticular structures are all involved. 
 According to Da Costa, the changes begin in the cartilage 
 with a multiplication of the cells and a degeneration of 
 intercellular substance. Wearing away of the joint* 
 cartilage in places brings pressure on the bones which 
 causes thinning, bulging and lengthening by deposits. 
 The deformity is marked and the motion limited but 
 without ankylosis. The fingers often show Heberden's 
 nodes. The process when located in the spine produces 
 spondylitis deformans. 
 
 Atrophic chronic arthritis is largely a disease of child- 
 hood and early adult life. Its onset is rather more rapid 
 than the hypertrophic type and more general in its dis- 
 tribution. The joints become spindle shaped; there is 
 general muscular atrophy. It is progressive in charac- 
 ter and the pronounced destruction of cartilage leads to 
 ankylosis. 
 
 Treatment. In no type of arthritis is the constitu- 
 tional treatment of as great importance as in this condi- 
 tion. Change of climate, particularly to one both warm
 
 142 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 and dry, is beneficial. Suitable exercise, fresh air, rest 
 and diet must be provided for. Tonics have their plac 
 but sedative drugs must be carefully guarded against be- 
 cause of the long duration of these joint affections. Use, 
 within the limit of strain, is to be recommended and 
 strain may be guarded against by a brace if desired. Com- 
 plete immobilization is only desirable for very short pe- 
 riods during acute exacerbation, and prolonged fixation 
 will but lead to earlier ankylosis. Local treatment by 
 means of the various forms of baking, massage and pas- 
 sive movements are of value in arresting the progress of 
 this condition. Operative interference, except for the 
 removal of solid bodies, or to excise small joints is contra- 
 indicated. 
 
 Acute Rheumatic Arthritis, Rheumatic Fever or Acute 
 Rheumatism is caused by a micro-organism and is char- 
 acterized by high fever, multiple joint inflammation and 
 predisposition to further attacks. It is often compli- 
 cated by endocarditis. The administration of salicylates, 
 the application of oil of wintergreen, or lead and opium 
 wash and the fixation of the affected joints constitute 
 the treatment. 
 
 Acute arthritis secondary to meningitis, scarlet fever, 
 etc., would receive the same local treatment while the dis- 
 ease itself was being properly attended to. 
 
 Tuberculous Arthritis. The process starts first in a 
 single joint. Others may later be involved. 
 
 Causes. The indirect causes are the lowering of local 
 resistance of joint structures as a result of trauma, 
 chilling, or chronic strain. The direct cause is the inva-
 
 JOINT INJURIES AND ARTHRITIS 143 
 
 eion of the tissues by the tnbercle bacillus which as a 
 rule first involves the bone. 
 
 Pathology. It spreads from the primary focus by 
 sinus formation to the synovial membrane and then to 
 the other parts of the joint. Tubercles form throughout 
 the joint structures which soften and thicken through 
 caseation. There is not marked fluid formation. This 
 process may develop into sinus formation opening ex- 
 ternally with consequent danger of pyogenic infection. 
 
 Symptoms. Swelling is usually not marked. Protec- 
 tive spasms of the muscles followed by their atrophy is 
 usually seen. Pain is often referred to structures at 
 some distance from the involved joint, for instance, in 
 hip cases to the inner side of the knee, and in spinal 
 cases to the front of the abdomen. Finally the tissues 
 become matted together, the joint distinctly rigid, the 
 skin white and thickened, the whole swelling spindle 
 shaped. Pain on movement is a constant symptom. 
 There is danger of systemic involvement with the tuber- 
 culous process^ 
 
 Treatment. Constitutional treatment is the same as 
 for other forms of tuberculosis. Local treatment con- 
 sists of fixation and extension. Superheated dry air and 
 Bier's hyperemia are helpful. The joint may be aspirated 
 and injected with iodoform and glycerin when there is a 
 large accumulation of fluid. When sinuses are formed, 
 opening externally, care must be taken to avoid mixed 
 infection. They may be injected with Beck's bismuth 
 paste. These conservative measures may prove suffi- 
 cient. If a trial of such treatment fails to improve the
 
 144 OETHOPEDICS 
 
 patient, operation is indicated and should be radical 
 and thorough. In cases showing amyloid degeneration 
 attempts at removing sequestra or forming bony anky- 
 losis of fresh healthy bone are useless and amputation 
 should be resorted to. 
 
 Gonorrheal Arthritis. Gonorrheal arthritis is a com- 
 plication occurring in about two per cent of the cases of 
 this disease. Its distribution in order of frequency is 
 knee, ankle, wrist, shoulder. 
 
 Treatment. This is first aimed at clearing up every 
 focus of infection, particularly the prostate and Bartho- 
 lin's glands, and unless this is thoroughly done local 
 treatment is of little avail. A large amount of destruc- 
 tion may follow the involvement of a joint and lead to 
 complete bony ankylosis. In the acute stage immobilize 
 and counter irritate by heat or ichthyol ointment. If 
 very severe aspirate, irrigate with hot saline and, if joint 
 fluid is purulent, incise, irrigate and fixate with drainage. 
 In the subacute stage treat with baking or passive hy- 
 peremia, massage and gentle passive movements. 
 
 Syphilitic Arthritis. Syphilis of the joints is rare as 
 compared to tuberculosis, the diaphysis of the bone be- 
 ing the part most often attacked. Hereditary syphilis 
 manifests itself during infancy as an osteochondritis 
 which may resemble rickets. It is not, however, usually 
 bilateral in distribution nor does it usually involve more 
 than two or three joints at once. In older children an 
 accompanying periostitis is common and the synovial 
 membrane may be so thickened as to interfere with nor- 
 mal joint movement. In acquired syphilis the joint may
 
 JOINT INJURIES AND ARTHRITIS 145 
 
 be involved in the secondary and tertiary stages. The 
 local symptoms are thickening of the joint structures and 
 increase in its fluid with but slight atrophy of surround- 
 ing muscles. There is pain on movement but it is not 
 usually limited by muscle spasm and it often persists 
 at night. Knee, shoulder and elbow are most often in- 
 volved. The diagnosis can be confirmed by the other con- 
 stitutional manifestations of the disease and by the 
 Wassermann test. 
 
 Treatment. Local treatment consists in rest and pro- 
 tection of the joint. The constitutional treatment is that 
 usually followed in this disease.
 
 Chapter X 
 DISEASES OF BONES 
 
 Periostitis. Inflammation of the periosteum may be 
 acute or chronic. Acute periostitis usually foUows in- 
 jury. There is a local inflammatory process, the pain 
 from which is marked at night. Function is interfered 
 with. The swelhng is usually spindle shaped and may 
 be due to a thickening of the periosteum and the ac- 
 cumulation of fluid in or beneath it. A subperiosteal 
 hematoma may form. This is sometimes difficult to dif- 
 ferentiate from an abscess. The latter would, however, 
 give much more marked signs of inflammation, together 
 with constitutional symptoms. The breaking down of 
 a hematoma through infection may occur and should be 
 guarded against. Periostitis, secondary to typhoid, 
 syphilis, tuberculosis and other diseases, is common, but 
 more apt to be chronic in type and to occur late in the 
 disease. In syphilis and tuberculosis a slight and un- 
 noticed injury may lead to localized periostitis. 
 
 Pathologically the periosteum becomes thickened, cell 
 proliferation increases and there is an extravasation of 
 serum in the tissues. In acute cases a discharging sinus 
 may form or the bone may become soft through sclerotic 
 condition of the overlying parts. In chronic cases, 
 though healing without the formation of a sinus, the 
 
 146
 
 DISEASES OF BONES 149 
 
 calcareous deposit within the periosteum of the affected 
 region may cause a roughened, granular character of the 
 surface. 
 
 Treatment. The most important consideration is ab- 
 solute rest of the diseased part. Complete immobiliza- 
 tion and elevation should be secured. Swelling and ten- 
 sion may be relieved by incisions to the bone into which 
 several small holes may be bored. In acute cases, where 
 septic conditions exist, the splitting of the periosteum is 
 advocated. Baking to improve circulation, and massage 
 to break up granules, and remove excessive exudate are 
 of utmost value. 
 
 Osteitis. This condition, being usually secondary to 
 periostitis or myelitis, has much the same symptoms. 
 The manifestation, especially in tuberculous cases, is very 
 slow, but pain and tenderness are more marked than in 
 periostitis. Tucerculous osteitis has been referred to 
 under arthritis. Sequestra, if formed in the bone, should 
 be excised and all operative procedures, if indicated, 
 should be radical and thorough. 
 
 Osteomyelitis. This acute disease first starts in the 
 spongy ends or medullary cavity of the bone and may 
 from there spread into the joint or along the shaft. Its 
 onset is characterized by high temperature and the gen- 
 eral symptoms of an acute infection. Suppuration may 
 take place and an abscess form. Periostitis, which is 
 usually present, may blur the picture. When this disease 
 occurs in the vertebrae, the bodies may be broken down 
 with subsequent injuries to the cord. The infective agent 
 may be ordinary pyogenic bacteria, tuberculous bacillus,
 
 150 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 the causative agent of typhoid, syphilis, measles, etc., or 
 by the action of phosphorus in the body. Bone necrosis 
 may follow rapidly. The concurrent formation of new 
 bone by the periosteum may develop an irregular cortex 
 while the deeper layers of the bone are being destroyed. 
 Direct infection from infected wounds, especially where 
 the bone is shattered and the circulation impaired, is 
 common. The process has been likened to gangrene of 
 the soft parts. A definite line of demarkation between 
 the sequestrum and true bone is often seen. The dead 
 bone, if small, is sometimes absorbed. If not, it breaks 
 down and produces a sinus. Osteomyelitis is extremely 
 serious, a fatal outcome being not unusual. Its early 
 diagnosis is most important. The X-ray is an invaluable 
 aid in the diagnosis in the following up of the condi- 
 tion. 
 
 Treatment. The infected area should be opened freely 
 and drained. The Carrel-Dakin drip is extremely help- 
 ful. Autogenous vaccines are sometimes of great as- 
 sistance. Thyroid medication is also used. In case of a 
 large amount of bone destruction all the diseased part 
 may be removed and a bone transplant may prove of 
 great assistance. 
 
 Osteomalacia. Pain and muscular weakness, similar 
 to conditions in rheumatism or some diseases of the 
 spinal cord, are the first symptoms of this disease, which 
 is most frequently found in nursing women, though it may 
 occur in men and even in children. Increasing deformi- 
 ties, chiefly in the spinal column and the pelvis, shown 
 by decrease in height and a waddling gait, are due to the
 
 DISEASES OF BONES 151 
 
 progressive softening of the bone, which can seldom be 
 arrested. Slight injuries often cause fracture, and death 
 occurs from exhaustion or disease of the lungs. 
 
 This condition may be differentiated from rheumatism 
 by the fact that the pain is found in numerous plaices. 
 Urinalysis usually discloses the presence of calcium salts 
 in excess. 
 
 As the lime salts are removed the basement substance 
 remains, retaining its laminated appearance, but further 
 progression may lead to disintegration and absorption 
 of this remaining substance. 
 
 Treatment. Improved hygiene, tonics, phosphorus 
 and iodides are useful. When the onset of the disease 
 is associated with pregnancy, oophorectomy is indicated 
 and further pregnancy should be avoided. In other types 
 Sajous recommends epinephrin injection. 
 
 Tuberculosis. Tuberculous disease of the bones is 
 very largely confined to cancellous bone. In the long 
 bones it would then make its appearance in fairly close 
 proximity to the joint and from there extend to the 
 periarticular tissues and often directly into the joint. 
 
 Symptoms and treatment of tuberculosis in these lo- 
 calities have been described under tuberculous arthritis. 
 
 Spinal Tuberculosis. The special manifestations of 
 this disease in the vertebrae have been described under 
 diseases and abnormalities of the spine.
 
 Chaptee XI 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS 
 
 THE UPPER EXTREMITY 
 
 Clavicle. Stemo-clavicidar Joint Dislocation. This 
 joint is dependent almost entirely on its ligaments for 
 support. Its dislocations are forward, backward and up- 
 ward, in order of frequency. 
 
 In forward dislocations, the sternal end of the clavicle 
 is prominent and occasionally overlaps part of the 
 sternum so that the downward inclination of the clavicle 
 is increased. 
 
 In backward dislocation, the prominence is less, and 
 there may be congestion of the face and neck on the af- 
 fected side. It is easily reduced by using the arm as 
 a lever with counter pressure in the axilla, assisted by 
 deep respiration on the part of the patient. Retention 
 is obtained by a molded pad and pressure with adhesive 
 plaster, assisted if necessary by a posterior figure of 
 eight to hold the shoulder back. The arm is supported 
 in a sling. 
 
 Fractures. Fractures of the clavicle are exceedingly 
 common. Its exposed position and the fact that it unites 
 the movable upper extremity and the trunk are the rea- 
 sons for its frequent fractures. At its inner aspect, the 
 attached fibers of the sterno-mastoid muscle pull upward 
 
 152
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS 153 
 
 and the pectoralis major downward, but the direct pull 
 of the former is nearly at right angles to the bone, that 
 of the latter more nearly parallel to it. The pull of the 
 stemo-mastoid is, therefore, stronger and the inner frag- 
 ment is usually displaced upward. On the outer third 
 of the bone, the antagonistic pull of the deltoid and the 
 trapezius are nearly equal and displacement is not usually 
 marked. 
 
 Symptoms. Pain, loss of function, and change of nor- 
 mal outline immediately follow. 
 
 Treatment. Reduce by traction on the shoulder, out- 
 ward, backward and upward and retain by a permanent 
 dressing. The modified Velpeau bandage or Sayre*s 
 dressing is good. In children, the Taylor brace and the 
 brace devised by Crane of Waterbury are both useful. All 
 of these dressings need constant care and adjustment 
 to take up slack and keep the part secure. 
 
 Acromio-clavicular Joint Dislocation. The joint is 
 covered by the superior and inferior clavicular and the 
 coraco-clavicular ligaments, the deltoid muscle in front 
 and the trapezius behind adding their support. Dislo- 
 cation of the clavicle upward is the common injury. 
 
 Symptoms. Pain in the joint, moderate loss of func- 
 tion, prominence of the outer end of the clavicle, and 
 sometimes prominence of the tip of the scapula are evi- 
 dent. Sir Robert Jones uses a simple sling for the wrist 
 and then binds down a small pad on the tip of the clavicle 
 by a bandage passed under the elbow and knotted firmly 
 on the shoulder. 
 
 Scapula. Fractures. The heavy, springy bed of mus-
 
 154 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 cle nearly surrounding the scapula makes it extreinely 
 difficult to fracture this bone. The spine and acromion 
 process, being more exposed, are occasionally fractured. 
 Separation of the acromial epiphysis, which unites quite 
 late, may be mistaken for fracture. The fracture may in- 
 volve the coracoid process, the glenoid cavity, or the 
 body below the spine. 
 
 Symptoms. Loss of function, pain increased by deep 
 respiration and crepitus are noted. X-ray is often neces- 
 sary to ascertain the extent, since crepitus may be lack- 
 ing. In the treatment, prevent muscular pull or move- 
 ment of the fragment and, if the body is affected, im- 
 mobilize the scapula as a whole by strapping, Velpeau 
 bandage or cast. Maintain from four to six weeks. Com- 
 plete return of function is the rule. 
 
 Shoulder. Surgical Anatomy. The shallow socket, 
 large variety of movement, and exposed position of the 
 shoulder joint make it the most frequent seat of dislo- 
 cation. The coracoid and acromion processes of the 
 scapula and their ligaments, while not entering into the 
 joint proper, protect it from above and prevent upward 
 dislocation, making this type the rarest of all. Mobility 
 being of prime importance, the socket is very shallow and 
 stability is dependent largely upon the muscles and ten- 
 dons. The capsular ligament entirely encircles the joint 
 from the rim of the glenoid cavity to the anatomical neck 
 of the humerus. It is quite lax and is put upon a tension 
 only at the limit of arm movement in the various direc- 
 tions. Muscle tone alone keeps the joint surfaces in ap- 
 position and the deltoid is mainly responsible for this.
 
 Fk;. o'.t. ('.vnoT I'o.stkuioh Lki; Sim. int. 
 [X-Ray (Fig. 38) shows injury to external condyle. 
 
 Fig. 40. Airplane Splint with Elbow Joint.
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS 157 
 
 The brachial plexus and vessels lie just internal to the 
 head. In injury the capsular ligament is always torn 
 and more or less harm is often done to the tendons over- 
 lying it. 
 
 Dislocations. In spite of the variety of directions 
 which the head may take, the following classification is 
 suflScient : 
 
 - -c J f Subcoracoid. (Most common.) 
 
 1. Forward. o i, i i 
 
 [ Subclavicular. 
 
 2. Do^-nward. I Subglenoid. (Very common.) 
 
 [ Subglenoid erecta. 
 
 o -D V. J { Subacromial. (Fairly common.) 
 I Subspinous. 
 
 4. Upward. (Uncommon.) 
 
 Subcoracoid. The head lies just below the coracoid 
 process, tearing the anterior and inferior part of the 
 capsule. The humerus is rotated inward ; the subscapu- 
 laris tendon is sometimes torn. Extreme degrees become 
 subclavicular. 
 
 Subclavicular. In this type the head is further in- 
 ward and slightly higher and all the structures are more 
 lacerated. Kocher's method of reduction is inefficient. 
 We get a flattening and sharpening of the shoulder; the 
 anterior axillary fold is lower; the elbow is abducted 
 and the head of the humerus lies beneath the coracoid 
 process. It is hard to place the hand on the uninjured 
 shoulder as the arm cannot be abducted. The patient 
 leans toward the injured side and usually allows the arm 
 to hang when he is standing.
 
 158 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 Treatment. Subcoracoid dislocation is most" easily 
 reduced by Kocher's method, the three main manipula- 
 tions of which are: 1. The surgeon standing in front, 
 grasps the patient's elbow with his opposite hand and 
 holds it against the side, grasping the wrist with his 
 other hand. The elbow is flexed to a right angle and the 
 arm rotated externally. 2. The elbow is brought gently 
 inward across the chest, the hand remaining fixed. Slight 
 force may be used several times if necessary and the head 
 slips into the glenoid cavity with a distinct sound. The 
 third manipulation should not be attempted until this 
 has happened, as replacement usually occurs at this point. 
 3. This consists in rotating the arm inward, bringing the 
 hand toward the opposite shoulder. 
 
 Another method is by horizontal abduction and manipu- 
 lation with surgeon's knee or flexed thigh under the axilla 
 while an assistant exerts traction on the arm. It is of 
 further advantage to have the scapula fixed. Slight 
 swinging or rotating of the arm will aid reduction. 
 
 Subglenoid. The head escapes through the inferior 
 and posterior fibers of the capsule, resting below the 
 acromion process or, in the subspinous variety, further 
 back under the spine of the scapula. 
 
 The shoulder is flattened ; the head cannot be palpated 
 in its normal position, but below the acromion process; 
 the humerus is rotated inward and is held in adduction. 
 
 Treatment by Kocher's method may be successfully 
 employed, but in the first movement the elbow should 
 be farther back to approximately the mid-axillary line. 
 Reduction may be obtained by traction accompanied by
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS 161 
 
 slight rotation and adduction. Operative treatment 
 should never be necessary in uncomplicated cases. 
 
 After treatment. Immobilize for several days to facili- 
 tate repair and carry arm in sling, but forbid abduction. 
 Allow slight active movements during the second and 
 third weeks and obtain complete abduction by the exer- 
 cises described for this desired result, the patient lying 
 prone. Common complications are fracture of the sur- 
 gical neck; associated dislocation is rare. It should 
 be treated by the open method and the use of McBurney's 
 hook to replace the head. Fracture of the anatomical 
 neck is still more rare. Here the head should be wired, 
 or, if it cannot be replaced, excised. Fracture of the 
 greater or lesser tuberosity should be wired unless it is 
 possible, after setting the dislocation, to abduct and ex- 
 ternally rotate the arm without redislocation. Bone 
 pegs and screws are sometimes used. 
 
 Fracture of the neck of the scapula leaves a movable 
 joint. The arm is easily adducted; the whole shoulder 
 dropped. The elbow is raised and retained by a fixating 
 bandage. 
 
 Recurring dislocations are treated by operation with 
 repair of the rent and occasionally tucks taken in the 
 relaxed capsular ligament. 
 
 Fractures op the Humerus. Fracture of the 
 Anatomical Neck. The line of fracture seldom follows 
 the anatomical neck exactly ; often the greater tuberosity 
 is included. Impaction and the separation of fragments 
 are common, especially in the aged. There are pain, swell-
 
 162 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 ing and hemorrhage, but the head is in place ; crepitus is 
 not easily obtained ; the shortening is not great. 
 
 When firmly impacted do not attempt to disengage. 
 Bind the arm with a modified Velpeau bandage, using a 
 triangular axillary pad. Massage is begun early, passive 
 movements late ; three weeks at least should elapse. Ab- 
 duction is then obtained in the prone lying position or 
 with overhead pulley weights. Several of our patients 
 have done extremely well when put up in a plaster in 
 extreme extension for five weeks, followed by massage 
 and passive movements. 
 
 Fractures of the Surgical NecTc. A great tendency to 
 displacement is manifest in these fractures. The lower 
 fragment is usually drawn toward the body, rotated in- 
 ternally and often elevated by the action of the deltoid 
 and biceps. This is best treated by traction made on the 
 arm in the line of its long axis with abduction and out- 
 ward rotation. The abduction should be carried to an 
 oblique side-upward plane. In this position traction 
 corrects the overriding and accurate setting is possible. 
 When secured the arm may then be lowered gently and 
 with great care, the elbow flexed to less than a right 
 angle and the arm fixed in this position. When displace- 
 ment tends to reoccur the arm should again be abducted 
 as described and fixed in that position in a cast. The fore- 
 arm should be included to insure external rotation and 
 may rest easily behind the head. 
 
 The unavoidable formation of adhesions after any of 
 these injuries, should be treated as described in arthritis 
 of the shoulder as soon as repair is complete.
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS 165 
 
 Ankylosis of the Shoulder. Where this complication 
 is inevitable Jones gives the following directions for ob- 
 taining the most useful position for the shoulder joint. 
 He says : ' * First, the arm should be abducted about sixty 
 degrees or more from the side, movement of the scapula 
 will easily replace the amount of abduction. Second, 
 the arm should be rotated out far enough for the hand 
 to be brought to the back of the head when the shoulder 
 is raised. Third, the elbow should be a little in front 
 of the mid-axillary hue, for convenience in handling table 
 implements, etc. 
 
 *'If these three points are attended to during the treat- 
 ment of an injury of the shoulder in which ankylosis is 
 inevitable, the muscles about the scapula will soon learn 
 to increase their range of movement. To hasten this the 
 patient should assiduously practice all possible move- 
 ments of the arm. 
 
 **A patient with an arm ankylosed in this position can 
 perform all ordinary movements so unobtrusively that 
 many people will fail to observe he has any limitation 
 of movement at the shoulder. * ' 
 
 Fractures of the Shaft of the Humerus. The wide 
 range of movement obtained by this bone makes it sub- 
 ject to a great variety of types of trauma. Single, trans- 
 verse or oblique through and through fractures are the 
 usual types. The close apposition of the musculospiral 
 nerve makes it especially prone to direct injury or to 
 later compression by the formation of a callus. 
 
 These fractures are usually easily recognized by the 
 deformity, shortening, hemorrhage, point of abnormal
 
 166 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 mobility and crepitus. Treatment will vary according 
 to the degree and amount of displacement. Simple trac- 
 tion and manipulation will usually realign the fragments 
 though anesthesia may be necessary. Fractures are 
 put up in the same manner as those of the upper end with 
 the triangular pad in the axilla, splint or plaster sup- 
 port and bandage to include the body. A protecting cap 
 of plaster over the shoulder or entire arm, including the 
 elbow, is of great service. 
 
 In the operative treatment, the fixation, which is occa- 
 sionally necessary, may be secured by bone pegs, screws, 
 wire or the Lane plate. 
 
 Fractures of the Lower End of the Humerus. Surgi- 
 cal Anatomy. Preston, in his description of the surgical 
 anatomy, says: "The lower end of the humerus articu- 
 lates with two bones ; the types of these articulations are 
 entirely different and the fractures occurring in this re- 
 gion are complex. The lower end of the bone curves 
 forward and is flattened from before backward. The 
 articular surfaces may be described roughly as a cylinder 
 mounted on the lower end of the shaft, with the axis of the 
 cylinder nearly transverse to the long axis of the shaft. 
 The outer end of the cylinder is at a slightly higher level 
 than the inner end. When the elbow is fully extended the 
 arm and forearm are not in the same straight line, but 
 form an angle of about 170 degrees, half of which is 
 caused by the obliquity of the articular surfaces of the 
 lower end of the humerus, while the other half is the 
 result of the position of the bones of the forearm. In 
 complete extension, therefore, we have the "carrying
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS 167 
 
 angle'* while in complete flexion the forearm comes in 
 contact with and folds directly upon the arm. When 
 the fragments, in fractures of the lower end of the 
 humerus, are allowed to unite in deformity, there may be 
 a disturbance in the carrying angle which is apparent 
 when the arm is extended, and in addition there may 
 also be a deformity in which the forearm does not fold 
 directly against the arm in acute flexion. The carrying 
 angle varies considerably in different individuals and the 
 examination should therefore include comparison with 
 the uninjured elbow. ' ' * 
 
 Types of these fractures are commonly transverse 
 above the condyles or through them. Either of the 
 condyles may be fractured ; that of the external often in- 
 cluding the capitellum and the internal, the trochlea. 
 Fractures of the capitellum by indirect violence, separa- 
 tion of the epiphysis, Y or T shaped fractures into the 
 joint are commonly noted fractures with extensive in- 
 volvement of the lower end of the humerus. 
 
 All of these fractures, except those of the olecranon, 
 are put up with the elbow in extreme flexion. Olecranon 
 fractures require extension. 
 
 Impairment of function is almost certain to follow 
 incomplete reduction or large callus formation. 
 
 Supra-condylar Fractures. When by direct or indi- 
 rect violence the lower fragment is displaced backward, 
 reduce by flexion and downward traction on the fore- 
 arm. Put up fully flexed to prevent callus formation. 
 
 Preston, "Fractures and Dislocations," Mosby Company, St. Louis. 
 Page 120.
 
 168 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 Reduce the extent of the flexion slightly after a few days, 
 reaching the right angle in about ten days. Passive and 
 active movements used early should be confined to the 
 range of movement between semi- and full flexion. 
 
 Epicondylar Fractures. Fractures of the epicondyle 
 not involving the joint or the capitellum are rare. There 
 is swelling and tenderness of the external condyle. The 
 fragment is not usually much displaced. 
 
 Epitrochlear Fractures. In this type there is separa- 
 tion of the internal epicondyle not involving the joint 
 or the trochlea. The symptoms are tenderness, pain and 
 hemorrhage along the inner side of the arm. Flexion 
 and extension of the elbow are not usually painful ex- 
 cept at their extreme limits. 
 
 Feactuees Involving the Joint. Fracture of the Ex- 
 ternnl Condyle. This includes the capitellum, is quite 
 common and the symptoms resemble epicondylar frac- 
 ture but are much more severe. There are almost total 
 loss of function, severe pain and marked swelling. The 
 joint is very unstable from side to side and may be moved 
 freely in this direction ; crepitus is usually present. The 
 deformity is described as * ' gunstock. ' * The fragment is 
 displaced downward and greatly turned. 
 
 Fractures of the Internal Condyle. The break ex- 
 tends through the trochlea. The same symptoms of pain, 
 swelling, hemorrhage and crepitus are present on the 
 inner side; the same lateral mobility is found. 
 
 Y shaped or comminuted fractures may partake large- 
 ly of either or both of the sets of symptoms just described 
 and are produced by the force of a blow transmitted
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS 169 
 
 through the olecranon and splitting the humerus. There 
 may be backward displacement of the elbow, but the 
 olecranon is uninjured. 
 
 Treatment. The surgeon grasps the back of the el- 
 bow with one hand, the wrist with the other and exerts 
 traction on the wrist until the forearm returns to its 
 normal alignment. The elbow is then fully flexed. Some 
 force may be required, as it may necessitate pushing back 
 fragments which have been displaced forward. The 
 hand behind the elbow can aid this replacement. Com- 
 plete flexion is absolutely essential. 
 
 After Treatment. Jones gives a simple rule for the 
 protection of any injury about the elbow from too early 
 movement. It is that the absence of tenderness about 
 the elbow indicates that it is ready for the second test, 
 which is the lengthening of the sling and allowing the 
 wrist to drop three inches. After two days, if the pa- 
 tient is able actively to flex the elbow fully, he may re- 
 peat the exercise to full extension daily. If, on the other 
 hand, the elbow becomes stiff by protective spasm, it is 
 an index that this procedure is premature and the elbow 
 should be put up in full flexion for another week. He ad- 
 vises against the use of the right angle internal splint for 
 the elbow. 
 
 Fractures of the Olecranon. Fracture may be of the 
 tip only or a large part of the process. If there is no 
 displacement of the fragment upward a pad placed above 
 and an anterior splint with the arm fully extended should 
 secure firm union in two or three weeks. 
 
 Fractures involving marked displacemnt by the ao-
 
 170 OETHOPEDICS 
 
 tion of the triceps should be fixed by wire, peg or kan- 
 garoo tendon and then treated as indicated. Care must 
 be taken not to injure the epiphysis in children and it is 
 sometimes wiser even with displacement to use the for- 
 mer method. In cases of elderly persons sufficient func- 
 tion can usually be obtained by extension and the pad. 
 
 Dislocation of the Elbow. Dislocations may be back- 
 ward, which are very common; outward, which are also 
 common; inward and forward, which are rare. 
 
 Surgical Anatomy. The radio-humeral joint is of the 
 condyloid variety, while the ulnar-humeral is a hinge 
 joint. The internal lateral ligament is divided into a 
 strong anterior and posterior band, as is also the ex- 
 ternal lateral ligament. Overextension of the elbow is 
 prevented by the anterior segments of the lateral liga- 
 ments, the anterior fibers of the capsular ligament and 
 the checking of the tip of the olecranon at the olecranon 
 fossa. Overflexion is prevented by resistance of the 
 lower part of the biceps to the forearm and by the 
 coronoid process checked by the coronoid fossa. 
 
 Backward Dislocations. The forearm is held almost 
 in extension; the tip of the olecranon is above its usual 
 plane and more prominent ; the forearm is shortened ; the 
 triceps tendon is prominent. The coronoid process is 
 behind the trochlea, the whole forearm rotated slightly 
 inward, the head of the radius behind the capitellum. 
 The same pain, immobility and swelling which occur in 
 other dislocations are of course present. We treat by 
 hyperextension and traction enough to clear the coronoid
 
 Fig. 45. Extensive Shrapnel Wouxd of Right Arm with Compound Com- 
 minuted Fracture of Humerus. 
 
 Some union with beginning necrosis of loose fragment metallic body 4x6 mm. 
 in front of injury. 
 
 Fig. 46. Machine-gun Bullet Through Condyles of the Left Humerus. 
 Treated by removable cast February 6, 1919. Elbow nearly ankylosed 
 only five degrees of movement in flexion. Four weeks of treatment increased 
 this range to forty degrees. 
 
 Fig. 47. Old Infected Gunshot Wound of Upper End of Right Radius and 
 Ulna Involving Elbow Joint. 
 Elbow ankylosed.
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS 173 
 
 process, and then fixation in complete flexion for two to 
 three weeks is necessary. 
 
 Lateral Dislocations. These dislocations are rare and 
 can usually be reduced by flexion of the forearm and ex- 
 tension of the arm, but an anesthetic may be necessary 
 to thoroughly relax the muscles. 
 
 Forward Dislocations. This type is very rare except 
 with olecranon fracture. Reduction is accomplished by 
 flexing the forearm and exerting traction under anes- 
 thesia if necessary. 
 
 Myositis Ossificans Traumatica. Improvement in 
 X-ray technique is revealing this as a rather common 
 sequela of elbow dislocation, especially of the backward 
 type. Torn tags of periosteum with its osteo-genetio 
 power probably start the ossification process. No known 
 means of arresting or curing this condition are available 
 but its prevention can to some extent be obtained by the 
 earliest possible reduction and the limitation of trauma 
 both then and later. Too early passive and active move- 
 ments should be avoided. The onset and progress of 
 the condition, if it occurs, is followed by means of the 
 X-ray. It is well to warn the patient of the possibility 
 of this complication and against too early vigorous use 
 of the arm. 
 
 Dislocation of the Radial Head. The orbicular liga- 
 ment is always torn. Press the head of the radius back 
 into place, flex fully with the forearm completely supinat- 
 ed, place pad over the radial head and bandage firmly. 
 
 Ankylosis of the Elhoiv. Where it is necessary to fix- 
 ate the elbow joint it should be done at just about forty*
 
 174 PHYSICAL RECONSTRUCTION 
 
 five degrees, as the weight of the arm may in time slightly 
 increase the angle to about fifty or fifty-five degrees. 
 
 Wounds of the Elhow Joint. There has been a large 
 proportion of septic wounds in the present war, many of 
 them causing a marked amount of destruction of joint 
 tissue. An extension wire splint, which will allow the 
 wound to be dressed without disturbing the joint, the 
 Carrel-Dakin drip and the use of passive movements 
 when the inflammation has entirely subsided, are achiev- 
 ing splendid results. 
 
 Fractures of the Head of the Radius. The head is 
 displaced; crepitus may be obtained by pronating and 
 supinating the hand, the head not rotating with the shaft. 
 This sign is absent in impacted cases. The biceps may 
 pull the upper fragment forward. The pressure pad 
 should be placed over the upper fragment and the arm 
 should be fised in moderate flexion. In fractures near the 
 head acute flexion without the pad is better. In com- 
 minuted fractures of the head operation is indicated. 
 After treatment, dressing should be tightened as the 
 swelling decreases and should be kept on from three to 
 five weeks. 
 
 Fractures of the Shaft of the Radius. There may be 
 a concavity over the point of fracture when the frag- 
 ments are displaced toward the ulna. Crepitus can usu- 
 ally be elicited. The greenstick fracture is the rule in 
 children and a slight bulging or depression may be the 
 only sign besides the localized pain. 
 
 Fracture of the Ulna. Symptoms are similar to the
 
 Figs. 48 & 49. Compouxd Comminuted Fracture, Oblique of Radius and 
 
 Transverse of Ulna with Over-riding of Fragments. 
 
 Pieces of shrapnel scattered over hand and wrist. 
 
 Fig. 50. Loss of Bone in the 2nd and 3rd Metacarpals with New Joint 
 Formation. (X-Ray Fig. 48.) 
 
 Fig. 51. Loss of Portion of 2nd and 3rd Metacarpal.
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS 177 
 
 above. This fracture is commonly caused by the back 
 kick of an automobile engine. 
 
 Fracture of Radiios and Ulna. The deformity is more 
 marked and sharper and there may be overriding. Green- 
 stick fractures show less angular deformity and the mo- 
 bility at the point of the" fracture, seen in through and 
 through breaks, is not present. All injuries to children 
 which could cause this type of fracture should be X-rayed. 
 Setting of transverse fractures is usually not difficult 
 except where there is overriding. This overriding must 
 be corrected by traction before attempting to reduce the 
 angle deformity. In trying to reduce angular deformity 
 pressure should not be made directly on it, but above. 
 Care must be taken to avoid tearing the soft parts. Anes- 
 thesia may be required and the open method can then 
 be pursued if necessary. A broad single splint will suffice 
 in greenstick. Anterior and posterior splints of curved 
 wood may be used where both bones are broken. Much 
 injury has been done by too tight bandaging. The rule 
 should be to use one broad splint where possible. 
 
 The Wrist. Colles' Fractures. Colles' fracture is a 
 fracture of the radius about three-quarters of an inch 
 from its lower end. It is usually associated with back- 
 ward displacement of the lower fragment, giving rise to 
 the typical ''silver fork" deformity, with occasional ro- 
 tation of the lower fragment toward the ulna. The close 
 approximation of important tendons, the function of 
 which is interfered with in displacement, makes accurate 
 reduction of great importance. 
 
 Reduction. A new and excellent procedure has been
 
 178 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 outlined by Sir Robert Jones. It is as follows : The sur- 
 geon grasps the patient's forearm with one hand so that 
 he can exert pressure against the projecting end of the 
 shaft; with his other hand on the back of the patient's 
 wrist he presses on the displaced fragment. A slight pull 
 and twist under pressure reduces the deformity.* 
 
 Another method of reduction is to grasp with the 
 thumbs above and the first fingers below the two frag- 
 ments. Use traction on the lower fragment to free it. It 
 may be necessary to increase the deformity at first to un- 
 lock impaction. Pressure with the thumbs, especially the 
 one on the lower fragment to correct its rerotation, will 
 bring the bones into proper apposition. 
 
 Where vicious union has taken place the use of the 
 Thomas wrench or open operation may be necessary. 
 
 Sprains of the wrist and associated synovitis are treat- 
 ed as those elsewhere. Careful X-ray work will reveal 
 the fact that many supposed sprains are in reality frac- 
 tures. 
 
 Dislocations. Dislocation of the wrist is rare. The 
 deformity and tenderness are below the wrist joint. The 
 tenderness is diffuse and the relation between the styloid 
 process of the radius and the ulna is undisturbed. These 
 dislocations are put up in overextension and the usual 
 treatment applied. 
 
 The Hand. Fractures. Fractures of the phalanges 
 and metacarpals may follow direct violence and are com- 
 mon in bare-hand fighting. 
 
 Jones, Col. Sir Eobert, "Injuries to Joints" ^Frowde, London. 
 Page 110.
 
 Fig. 52. Extension Applied to Fracture of Both Bones of the Forearm. 
 
 Fig. 53. Bradford Frame with Extension .\pplied to Leg for Fracture op 
 Femur with Shortening.
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS 181 
 
 Diagnosis and treatment are usually easy. Fixation 
 of the clenched hand over a roller bandage with adhesive 
 is a convenient means of splinting the metacarpals. A 
 straight posterior splint or, if preferred, an anterior one, 
 the splint being slightly wider than the finger, may be 
 used for fixation of the phalanges. 
 
 The metacarpo-phalangeal joints are condyloid and al- 
 low adduction, abduction and circumduction, in addition 
 to flexion and extension. There are two lateral and one 
 anterior ligament, the extension tendon serving this pur- 
 pose posteriorly. There is great variation among differ- 
 ent individuals in the normal range of movement possi- 
 ble. The thumb and index finger are the most frequently 
 injured. These joints may be dislocated in any direc- 
 tion. 
 
 Diagnosis is easily apparent by the displacement of the 
 finger. Occasionally the anterior ligament makes re- 
 duction difficult. When there is overriding, increase the 
 deformity until the distal bone can be started over the 
 head of the proximal. Fixation with early passive move- 
 ment is indicated. 
 
 Dislocation of the carpal-metacarpal joint is usually 
 confined to the first, which is easily diagnosed and re- 
 duced. A curved splint extended over the base of the 
 thumb will retain the corrected position. 
 
 Dislocations. Dislocation of the phalangeal joints is 
 obvious ; the pain and displacement usually marked. Ex- 
 tension with accurate setting and the fixation is all that 
 is required. These injuries are common in athletics,
 
 182 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 often following awkward catching of a baseball or bas- 
 ketball, and tend to recur easily. 
 
 Separation and displacement of the epiphysis instead 
 of dislocation at the joint is common, and perfect re- 
 alignment with fixation for two weeks is necessary.
 
 Chapter Xn 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS (Con't) 
 
 THE LOWEB EXTREMITY 
 
 Pelvis. Types of Fracture. The following varieties of 
 fracture of the pelvis may be seen : 1. Fracture through 
 the rami of the ischium. 2. Fracture of the acetabulum. 
 3. Fracture of the tuberosity of the ischium. 4. Frac- 
 tures of the iliac crest. 5. Fracture of the anterior su- 
 perior spines. 
 
 Fractures of the Rami. These fractures result from 
 falls or blows on the front of the pelvis, or by crushing 
 from the side. They may include the pubic bone or be 
 complicated by fractures near the sacro-iliac joint or 
 communicating with it. Displacement is not usually 
 great, though it may be at first followed by partial re- 
 turn to position. During its excursion it may extensively 
 injure the soft parts, which must be carefully examined 
 for injury in all fractures of this type. 
 
 Symptoms noted are hemorrhage, pajn and local ten- 
 derness, aggravated by leg movements, but are limited 
 to the affected side. Mobility and crepitus are occasion- 
 ally present. Displacement is uncommon, but if present 
 replacement manually is not difficult. We treat by sup- 
 port by a sandbag, strapping or a snug, heavy bandage, 
 
 183
 
 184 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 canvas and leather supports are often useful. Good re- 
 covery of function is the rule. 
 
 When complicated by a fracture at the back of the 
 pelvis, so-called double-vertical fracture, which is usually 
 caused by tremendous pressure, the treatment is more 
 complicated. The fragment is usually displaced upward ; 
 occasionally the front of one side of the pelvis and the 
 back of the other is broken, usually with less displace- 
 ment. The main symptoms are asymmetry, mobility, 
 pain, etc. X-ray diagnosis is essential. 
 
 The pain is felt both front and back on bilateral pres- 
 sure upon the crests of the ilia. Treat by reducing the 
 upward displacement by Buck's extension apparatus, 
 using eighteen to twenty-four pounds. If the patient sur- 
 vives the extensive shock, fair return of function may be 
 hoped for. 
 
 Fracture of the Acetabulum. This fracture is often 
 complicated with backward dislocation of the hip joint 
 and may cause recurrence of the subluxation beside add- 
 ing to the difficulty of replacement. 
 
 Fractures extending through the center of the acetabu- 
 lum are caused by the impact of the femoral head. Un- 
 less the head penetrates the acetabulum symptoms are 
 not marked and the condition is seldom diagnosed. Mo- 
 bility and the bony landmarks remain about the same. 
 When complicated with penetration there is often ex- 
 tensive injury to the soft parts and the injury, though 
 rare, is usually fatal. Usually the great trochanter of 
 the femur is less prominent; the fascia lata is relaxed; 
 occasionally there is outward rotation of the hip; hem-
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS (con't) 185 
 
 orrhage is apt to be severe. The leg should be abducted 
 and extended and a block for counter pressure may be 
 placed between the thighs so that the femoral head is 
 wedged. 
 
 Prognosis is unfavorable for functional recovery. 
 
 Fracture of the Iliac Crests. This occurs from blows 
 or falls on the side. There is little impairment of func- 
 tion. Displacement is usually inward. Swelling, tender- 
 ness, crepitus and internal displacement are marked. It 
 is possible to reduce the fragment occasionally in thin 
 subjects. Immobilize with adhesive plaster or bandage 
 with even, very light pressure. Tight bandaging will 
 force the fragment inward. Early union takes place, but 
 at least four weeks must be allowed before the fragment 
 can be safely pulled upon by its attached muscles. 
 
 Fractures of the Anterior Superior Spine. This is 
 rare, but is occasionally caused by direct muscular action 
 in sprinting or jumping. Every ''pulled" tendon should 
 be carefully examined. Displacement is not great. 
 
 Flex the leg slightly and immobilize. 
 
 Dislocation of the Symphysis Pubis. Diagnosis. This 
 condition, which is most frequently post-obstetric, is char- 
 acterized by pain on pressure, or by abduction of the 
 thighs and usually hemorrhage. More marked separation 
 is very rare but may occur as a result of falls or horse- 
 back riding. In such cases the symptoms are more marked 
 and may be accompanied by laceration of the soft in- 
 ternal parts, by fractures or by dislocation of the sacro- 
 iliac joints. One should immobilize by a pelvic girdle, 
 by traction and immobilization in case of vertical dis-
 
 186 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 placement, or wiring in case of separation without too 
 extensive injury; generally there results a good restora- 
 tion of function. 
 
 Dislocation of the Hip Joint. Hip dislocation is rare 
 in comparison with fractures of the femur and does not 
 warrant the space given to this subject in the average 
 text-book. It is commonest in the adult male. The 
 simplest classification is into anterior and posterior types, 
 according to the position of the femoral head in rela- 
 tion to the acetabulum and the ligaments, especially the 
 Y ligament of Bigelow. 
 
 T[he anterior dislocations are sometimes divided into 
 pubic, suprapubic, perineal and obturator types, and the 
 posterior into ischial and dorsal. 
 
 Posterior Dislocations, the commonest type, is usually 
 caused by falls or blows from in back. Inward rotation 
 makes possible this backward slipping, especially when 
 accompanied by adduction and partial flexion. The pos- 
 terior and inferior fibers of the capsule are torn. The 
 following muscle tendons and sometimes the muscles 
 themselves are frequently torn: the obturator externus 
 and intemus, quadratus and pyriformis and sometimes 
 the gluteus maximus. The other muscles are less often 
 affected. When this dislocation occurs the leg is held 
 flexed and adducted; there is often some real and a 
 large amount of apparent shortening. The leg is also 
 inverted and the patient may rest on the sound foot. All 
 these symptoms are aggravated when the head is dislo- 
 cated posteriorly and inferiorly and the higher its posi- 
 tion, the less marked they are. The head is absent from
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS (conH) 187 
 
 its normal position and is felt posteriorly and is felt to 
 move on any movement of the femur. The trochanter is 
 above Nelaton's line and shortening is found by the usual 
 measurement from the anterior superior spine to the 
 internal malleolus. A still more accurate measurement 
 is by means of Bryant's triangle. The patient supine, a 
 line between the great trochanter and the anterior su- 
 perior spine, and a perpendicular line from the anterior 
 superior spine to the table are drawn. The short side of 
 the triangle will be the horizontal line between the per- 
 pendicular and the great trochanter, and it is this line 
 that is shortened. 
 
 Treat by Bigelow's method. Patient supine, the leg 
 is adducted, flexed and internally rotated followed by 
 forward traction and abduction. This should be done as 
 one continuous movement if possible. 
 
 There is considerable injury to soft parts by Bige- 
 low's method which, however, is a great improvement 
 over the older and more forceful maneuvers. Less injury 
 is apt to be done by the Allis and gravity method. 
 
 The Allis Method. Patient supine, the thigh and knee 
 are flexed to right angles depressing the head with counter 
 pressure downward on the pelvis by strap, assistant or 
 surgeon's foot, the surgeon exerts traction upward as if 
 trying to lift the patient by the lower leg, the femur per- 
 pendicular. Gently rotate inward and outward several 
 times, each followed by upward traction if necessary. 
 
 Gravity Method. Patient lies prone, pelvis at end of 
 table, hip and knee flexed at right angles. Support the 
 ankle and give gentle pressure downward just behind the
 
 188 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 knee. It may take a little time before the muscles relax 
 and the bone slips into place. If one or both of these 
 methods fail, then the Bigelow method should be tried. 
 
 Anterior Dislocation. This occurs most often in blows 
 or falls on the abducted leg. Here, too, the head es- 
 capes low down and then travels forward through the 
 lower and anterior fibers. The Y ligament is not usually 
 injured; the ligamentum teres is usually torn; the mus- 
 cles are rarely injured. The leg is extended, abducted 
 and rotated outward; the patient can bear considerable 
 weight on the leg. The head is displaced inward, gen- 
 erally below the center of Poupart's ligament. The Y 
 ligament generally lies in close apposition to the neck 
 and may be used as a fulcrum to restore the head to place. 
 
 Allis Method. The patient lies supine, the surgeon 
 grasps just behind the flexed knee, abducts the slightly 
 flexed thigh sharply and exerts traction. An assistant 
 presses against the head while the thigh is adducted. 
 
 Rotation Method. This method is attended by dan- 
 ger of injury to the soft parts and the sciatic nerve and 
 should, therefore, be very gently performed. It may 
 be performed in two ways: 
 
 1. Inward Rotation. The thigh is partially flexed and 
 then, with downward traction, is abducted, adducted and 
 rotated inward so that the head slips into place and the 
 thigh may be lowered to full extension. 
 
 2. Outward Rotation. The thigh is partially flexed and 
 adducted, the knee lowered and adducted and the thigh 
 then rotated outward. 
 
 Fractures of the Upper End of the Femur. These
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS (con't) 191 
 
 fractures are divided roughly into intra-capsular and 
 extra-capsular types. Displacement varies slightly by 
 the plane of the fracture and the direction of the muscle 
 pull. As a general rule in fractures of the neck there is 
 overriding of the lower fragment upward which is cor- 
 rected by extension in the abducted position with slight 
 inward rotation. Fixation of the pelvis as well as the 
 leg is essential, and fixation of the whole trunk desirable. 
 This can be done by means of a posterior body frame- 
 brace by the Thomas posterior splint or by extending the 
 plaster cast to the axilla. The question of the amount of 
 impaction is more important to determine than the exact 
 location of the break. As a rule impaction favors union. 
 Fractures at the Epiphysis of the Head. Injury at 
 this point is of fairly common occurrence among school- 
 boy athletes. It often follows slight trauma, or repeated 
 slight trauma, the symptoms of which at the time are 
 mainly those of hip joint strain or sprain. For this rea- 
 son it is very often not discovered for some time. All the 
 movements of the limb may be normal except for some 
 pain and spasm upon abduction and rotation. Increas- 
 ing lameness after another similar injury may lead to 
 an X-ray, when the trouble is discovered. Again the 
 symptoms may resemble a beginning hip tuberculosis 
 with some limitation of movement in all directions, and 
 obvious shortening, the great trochanter being above 
 Nelaton's line. The symptoms also resemble coxa vara 
 and some authors call this condition traumatic coxa 
 vera. We must also differentiate this condition from 
 Perth's disease, or osteochondritis, with its flattening of
 
 192 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 the head and shortening and thickening of the neck. 
 Especially difficult is it without the help of the X-ray to 
 differentiate this condition from late rickets. 
 
 Treatment consists in abduction and extension under 
 anesthesia if necessary with fixation for five or six weeks. 
 
 Intracapsular Fractures. Fractures of this type 
 through the neck of the femur occur most often in late life 
 as a result of falls. Sudden twists of the leg are suffi- 
 cient to produce it when the bone is much rarefied. 
 
 Pain, mobility, crepitus, and shortening to some extent 
 are present. Treatment should be by the posterior ab- 
 duction frame or Thomas splint in extension, abduc- 
 tion, and slight inward rotation, the correction of the 
 deformity being verified by the X-ray. Fixation may be 
 obtained by plaster, in which case the cast should run 
 from the chest to the toes. Special care to prevent a col- 
 lection of fluid in the posterior lobe of the lung by too 
 long recumbency, or the development of pressure sores 
 must be guarded against. 
 
 Extracapsular Fractures. These are more apt to oc- 
 cur in adult life by severe blows or falls on the trochanter. 
 There is likely to be firm impaction with little loss of 
 function and I have known of one heavy woman who 
 walked for weeks with such a fracture. 
 
 More marked shortening occurs than in the previous 
 type unless there is impaction-. Slight eversion of the 
 leg, apparent broadening of the trochanter, crepitus and 
 pain are noted. 
 
 The treatment is the same as for the intracapsular
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS (con't) 193 
 
 type except when there is marked impaction with de- 
 formity. Here the impaction must first be broken up. 
 
 Fractures of the Shaft of the Femur. These fractures 
 are apt to be oblique with considerable tearing of the soft 
 parts. 
 
 Symptoms. Great swelling and disability, pain, de- 
 formity, marked mobility at the seat of the fracture, ro- 
 tation of the leg at this point and crepitus are noted. 
 Measurements unless accurate are useless. A simple 
 rule is to lay the patient on a hard, even surface with a 
 vertical line corresponding exactly to the sagittal plane 
 and another at right angles directly under the anterior 
 superior spines. 
 
 For transportation, if necessary, a pillow or roll of 
 blankets should be placed around the extended leg sup- 
 ported by side and rear splints of wood. When all the 
 material is at hand for setting, the patient may be 
 anesthetized. The foot should be included in the perma- 
 nent dressing and kept at right angles. Extension should 
 be by means of weights with the leg elevated by a Brad- 
 ford frame or bed elevated at the foot. 
 
 The Caliper Extension. The caliper or ice tong 
 method of extension, devised by Major F. A. Berley, 
 has been used with good success in the army. A small 
 incision just large enough to admit the point of the 
 caliper is made just over the most prominent part of 
 the condyles and they are driven about a quarter of an 
 inch into the bone, a little higher on the inner side. Care 
 must be taken not to enter the knee joint. The leg is 
 slung by a Balkan frame with ten to fifteen pounds weight
 
 194 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 exerting traction in the line of the femur. This position 
 facilitates nursing the patient, and infection incident to 
 the use of the tongs has now been reduced to two or 
 three per cent. 
 
 Fractures of the Lower End of the Femur. Surgical 
 Anatomy. Most of the lateral surface of the condyles is 
 subcutaneous. The popliteal artery lies close to the pos- 
 terior surface and is often pressed upon by one of the 
 fragments. The nerve and vein of the same name are fur- 
 ther from the bone and not as often injured. The most 
 common fracture is transverse, just above the condyles, 
 but they may be fractured separately or a T shaped frac- 
 ture may extend to the joint. The epiphysis may be 
 separated. A fragment may be displaced in any direc- 
 tion but the pull of the gastrocnemius will usually dis- 
 place the fragment backward. When the epiphysis is 
 separated, on the other hand, it is usually displaced for- 
 ward. There are pain, swelling, unnatural mobility; tfie 
 leg may be helplessly rotated outward ; crepitus may be 
 present. Soft crepitus denotes epiphyseal separation but 
 overriding and shortening are the rule. 
 
 Anesthesia is usually necessary. Early reduction is 
 essential because of the danger of possible injury to the 
 popliteal artery. Since there is great danger of injury to 
 this vessel by the manipulations incident to setting, great 
 care must be used. Never press in the popliteal space. 
 Besides the caliper method mentioned, the Cabot pos- 
 terior wire splint, the Dupuy adjustable splint or the 
 Hogden splint may be used. The first two are arranged 
 in a double inclined plane. Operative treatment is indi-
 
 FKACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS (con't) 195 
 
 cated whenever good reduction cannot be obtained. The 
 incision should be along the inner border of the quadri- 
 ceps extensor. The use of the bone-hooks or forceps may 
 be necessary. In fractures involving the joints two in- 
 cisions may be necessary. Open the knee joint only as a 
 last resort and then only under rigid aseptic precau- 
 tions. The Lane plate or bone pegs may be used when 
 the epiphysis is not involved. 
 
 After Treatment. Considerable swelling and some 
 arthritis of the knee joint are to be expected. The use of 
 ice is an important aid. Between the second and fourth 
 weeks the knee should be gradually extended, massage 
 and passive movements begun; after which an ambula- 
 tory splint may be worn for two weeks. 
 
 Fractures of the Patella. It must be remembered that 
 the patella is really the sesamoid bone enveloped by the 
 tendon of the quadriceps extensor, and is attached below 
 to the tubercle of the tibia by the patellar ligament. Its 
 under surface directly connects with the knee joint. 
 Fractures are usually transverse, caused by blows on the 
 flexed knee. Muscular action alone causes a great many 
 fractures. Many of them, especially of the lower half, 
 are comminuted. 
 
 Symptoms. Pain with difficulty or inability to extend 
 the leg is constantly present. Crepitus is present if the 
 fragments are not too widely separated. The swelling 
 is rapid and extensive; there is usually considerable 
 hemorrhage, especially at the sides. With improved 
 technique the operative method is to be preferred. Bony 
 union seldom follows conservative treatment. In non-
 
 196 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 operative treatment the leg should be well padded and 
 splinted behind; the leg and thigh fixed firmly and a 
 figure of eight strapping crossing at the sides pressing 
 the fragments firmly together should be used. 
 
 Operative Treatment. The knee may be opened by 
 semi-lunar incision, concave above, or by vertical incision. 
 The fragments should be wired, preferably by mattress 
 suture after any blood clot in the joint has been removed 
 and the joint washed out with saline. The patellar lig- 
 ament should be inspected for tears and any such re- 
 paired. In comminuted fractures all small fragments 
 should be removed. In a recent case of extreme fragmen- 
 tation following a kick by a horse more than half of the 
 patella was removed with an excellent functional result. 
 J. T. Rugh of Philadelphia has demonstrated in a num- 
 ber of cases that a patient can get along perfectly well 
 with the bone excised. Passive movements and massage 
 are indicated after the fourth week. If healing is delayed 
 protection for several months is indicated. 
 
 Dislocations of the Patella. These injuries are not 
 very common ; the internal are more common than the ex- 
 ternal subluxations. The symptoms of intense pain, loss 
 of function, and the easily recognized deformity, are 
 marked. 
 
 Spontaneous reduction may take place. The knee 
 should be completely extended with the thigh flexed: 
 Slight pressure is usually enough to cause it to slip back 
 into place. When the patella is rotated, palpation of the 
 ligament will show the direction. Old unreduced cases 
 may necessitate operation.
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS (con't) 197 
 
 After Treatment. A supporting bandage, and ice-cap 
 if necessary, are used, and careful use of the knee for 
 some time should be insisted upon. 
 
 Dislocation of the Knee. This is a rare condition. The 
 most common type is forward and backward, outward and 
 inward in order. We get pain, swelling, loss of function 
 and considerable shock. 
 
 Treat by traction. Buck's extension if necessary. Oper- 
 ation may be necessary in complete dislocation. Immob- 
 ilize for three months with a posterior splint and watch 
 the circulation carefully. Stimulation and opiates are 
 sometimes required by the patient's general condition. 
 Immobilize for three months, using baking frequently. 
 
 Fractures amd Dislocations of the Semi-lunar Carti- 
 lages. These cartilages are semi-lunar in shape, thick- 
 ened at their margin, the inner edge being free in the 
 joint. The internal cartilage is closely associated with the 
 internal lateral ligament and they are both affected by the 
 same type of strain. Sudden pain in the knee after strain 
 or injury and partial flexion is noted. The joint locks and 
 extension is impossible. After manipulation a sudden 
 snap is felt in the joint with return of normal function. 
 Inflammatory reaction is set up in the joint tissues and 
 persists for a varying length of time. Recurrence with 
 increasing frequency is the rule. Occasionally locking is 
 not present. The internal cartilage is the most often in- 
 jured. The pain may be here or referred to the patella. 
 
 Place the patient prone, knee flexed, rotate slowly from 
 side to side. Flexing the knee over the surgeon's wrist is 
 a means of separating the articular surfaces of the joint.
 
 198 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 Free, painless extension is the sign of reduction of the 
 deformity. The knee should then be protected from over- 
 use or strain by a simple hinge brace. In recurrent cases 
 the cartilage should be excised. 
 
 Rupture of the Crucial Ligaments. This follows se- 
 vere twists of the knee. Almost immediately there are 
 severe pain and great swelling which make the joint inse- 
 cure. The function of the anterior ligament is to prevent 
 forward displacement of the tibia and it is tense in com- 
 plete extension of the leg. The posterior ligament, on 
 the other hand, holds the tibia forward and is placed in 
 tension when the knee is completely flexed. Acting to- 
 gether, they prevent twisting of the leg inward. Testing 
 these different movements will show the extent of the in- 
 jury which has taken place. 
 
 Treat by fixation in extension; a posterior splint fol- 
 lowed by the use of the hinge brace is recommended. 
 Operative interference is seldom indicated. The spine of 
 the tibia is sometimes torn off in association with rup- 
 ture of these ligaments. The knee should be put up in full 
 extension. X-ray diagnosis is essential. 
 
 Fracture of the Upper End of the Tibia and Fibula. 
 Fractures of Tibial Tuberosities. We find disability, 
 pain, swelling and traumatic arthritis are present ; lateral 
 stability of the knee is often lost. The deformity is 
 usually recognized since it is subcutaneous. Separation 
 of the upper epiphysis of the tibia is rather rare; the 
 fragment may be displaced in any direction and crepitus 
 is soft. 
 
 Fracture of the Upper End of the Fibula, There are
 
 FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS (con't) 201 
 
 pain and local tenderness, but less involvement of the 
 knee and less disability; the head may be movable; the 
 perineal nerve may be injured. Reduce, immobilize, and 
 begin passive movement and massage the third week. In 
 case of impaction use Buck's extension. Operative treat- 
 ment may be necessary. Treatment may have to be ap- 
 plied to the knee joint. 
 
 Fractures of the Shaft of the Tibia and Fibula. These 
 fractures are rather common from either direct or indi- 
 rect violence. Fracture of either bone separately is 
 usually the result of a direct blow. Compound fractures 
 are common. 
 
 Pain, swelling and deformity, abnormal mobility, and 
 crepitus are common. Abnormal mobility is greater when 
 both bones are broken. There may be little loss of func- 
 tion in fractures of the fibula alone. Hemorrhage is often 
 severe. The greenstick fractures of chOdren sometimes 
 present few symptoms but pain and bowing. The diagno- 
 sis is made by X-ray. 
 
 For transportation the leg should be splinted both sides 
 and rear, supported below the foot and well padded. Ex- 
 tension applied to the foot flexed nearly to a right angle is 
 useful. Posterior wire splints or plaster splints are com- 
 monly used. Operative treatment should be instituted 
 wherever good apposition is otherwise impossible. An 
 ambulatory splint should be used if possible at the end 
 of the first week. Great caution is necessary when begin- 
 ning use of the limb. Weight bearing should be extremely 
 gradual and the condition of the callus watched by the
 
 202 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 X-ray. Heat, massage, and passive movements of the 
 ankle and knee should be used early. 
 
 Fractures of the Lower End of the Tibia and Fibula. 
 Pott's Fracture, This is a combination of fracture and 
 dislocation. 
 
 Surgical Anatomy. The ankle joint is formed by the 
 fibula externally, the tibia above and internally and the 
 astragalus below. The two leg bones are bound by the 
 strong tibio-fibular ligaments. The lateral Ugaments are 
 also very strong and are more apt to be pulled away than 
 torn through. The external malleolus is longer and lower 
 than the internal. The weight-bearing surface of the 
 heel is slightly outside in the longitudinal plane of the 
 tibia, hence, landing squarely on the feet with great force 
 tends to lateral and upward displacement of the foot. 
 This force is applied directly against the lower end of the 
 fibula and on the internal lateral ligament. Either this 
 ligament is ruptured or the tip of the malleolus is torn off. 
 
 There are absolute loss of function, pain, swelling and 
 characteristic eversion of the foot; the greater promi- 
 nence of the internal malleolus ; crepitus is usually lack- 
 ing and the heel may appear prominent. Marked swell- 
 ing may mask the symptoms; delayed hemorrhage is 
 often seen. 
 
 Inversion and upward replacement of the foot is nec- 
 essary. The padded internal splint of Dupuytren should 
 be used early. The padding just above the fracture is 
 used as a fulcrum to invert the foot. The Cabot wire 
 splint may be used throughout. Stimson*s plaster splint 
 is best after the first week. It consists of a posterior seg-
 
 FKACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS (con't) 203 
 
 ment from the knee to the toes and an external one which 
 is continued beneath the foot and over its dorsum to the 
 external malleolus. The foot must be placed at a right 
 angle. The splint should remain on five or six weeks, 
 massage begun in the second week. Weight bearing 
 should be gradual and guarded. 
 
 Fracture of Both Bones Above the Ankle. The symp- 
 toms are pain, swelling, loss of function, crepitus, preter- 
 natural mobility. The deformity is usually marked and 
 easily recognized. 
 
 Treatment is the same as for fractures of the shaft. 
 
 Dislocation of the Ankle. These are usually forward 
 or backward. Lateral dislocations are generally associ- 
 ated with fracture. 
 
 Posterior Dislocations. Prominence of the tibia and 
 the obvious deformity are seen. 
 
 Place the patient supine, fix the ankle with traction 
 downward, grasp behind the heel, pull backward, down- 
 ward, forward. 
 
 Forward Dislocations. This is usually associated with 
 fracture, and if so, operative treatment may be necessary. 
 
 Fractures of the Tarsus. These should be diagnosed 
 by the X-ray, replaced as well as possible and immobilized 
 with plaster. 
 
 Fractures of the Metatarsus. The symptoms vary 
 greatly with the severity of the injury. Crushed wounds 
 often cause multiple fractures with extensive damage to 
 the soft parts. Pain, swelling, crepitus, and tenderness 
 are the usual symptoms. Pressure beneath the toes on 
 the head of the metatarsal bones is one method of elicit-
 
 204 OBTHOPEDICS 
 
 ing pain. Eeduce the deformity by pressure pad and 
 immobilize in a cast. 
 
 Fractures and Dislocations of the Phalanges. The 
 symptoms are similar to those described for the fingers. 
 The deformity should be reduced and the foot encased in 
 plaster. Where the injury has been done to the great toe, 
 the patient should not be allowed to walk until bony union 
 has taken place or inflammatory reaction has subsided. 
 In the other phalanges use may be allowed much earlier.
 
 Chapteb XIII 
 
 FOOT STRAIN 
 
 The Main Arch. Classification. Three degrees of this 
 condition have been described: 
 
 1. The weak foot. This is a condition in which the 
 patient complains of discomfort or pain in the arch when 
 overfatigued or following prolonged use of the foot, es- 
 pecially during hot weather. The arch is little, if any, 
 lowered. 
 
 2. The strained foot. Here the arch is coming down. 
 The pain is very severe and may be referred to the back 
 of the leg, front of the thigh, or even the back. The sca- 
 phoid is usually prominent. This condition must be vis- 
 ualized as the breaking stage. 
 
 3. Absolute flat foot. Here the damage has been done. 
 The arch is flat and the inner border of the foot bulges 
 considerably. There is no pain and, indeed, sometimes 
 never has been, if the condition is gradual enough in its 
 onset. The patient often consults the orthopedist because 
 some person has told him he is flat footed, or because he 
 has been rejected from the service. The author has been 
 consulted by many young men, from naval recruiting sta- 
 tions, who were utterly unaware of the existence of this 
 condition or their probable rejection from the service on. 
 
 account of it. 
 
 205
 
 206 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 Causes. Before any intelligent conception of the rea- 
 sons underlying the great prevalence of this condition can 
 be gained, it is necessary to consider the way in which 
 savage, or natural, man used his feet, and the extensive 
 changes that civilization has brought about. The normal 
 movement of the bare or moccasined foot in walking is a 
 grasping one, which constantly exercises the three layers 
 of muscle whose normal tone, with the long and short 
 plantar ligaments, helps to retain the form of the arch. 
 The foot is pointed straight forward or slightly toeing in ; 
 the heel, outer border, ball of the foot and toes carry the 
 weight. 
 
 "We no longer usually walk upon sand or springy turf, 
 but a rapidly increasing part of our population is con- 
 demned to solid pavements and hardwood floors, and such 
 conditions cause strain. It being considered the proper 
 thing to toe out, it is insisted upon that the child fall in 
 line with this convention. In such a foot position, since the 
 momentum of the body is going straight forward, if the 
 weight hits the heel on the outer side with the foot 
 everted, it must necessarily be transmitted across the foot 
 directly onto the arch, instead of along the outer border 
 of the foot, and straight forward. 
 
 We further impede normal use of the arch muscles by 
 placing a rigid leather sole on the shoe. In women's shoes 
 several points in consideration of the heel are important. 
 The very high heel, by causing long held contraction of 
 the calf muscle, may lead to its structural shortening. 
 This height induces an artificially high arch, which is 
 withal a weak one. It makes such a steep incline in the
 
 ^K^R^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^V 
 
 
 
 'Hi ^HK^ 
 
 Fig. 59. Exercise II. Walking Forward on Outer Edge. 
 Fig. 60. Exercise III. Rising on Toes, Toeing in. 
 Fig. 61. Exercise IV. Walking Forward on Outer Edge, Toeing in. 
 Fig. 62. Exercise V. Ground Gripper Walk.
 
 FOOT STRAIN 209 
 
 shank that efficient weight bearing there is impossible and 
 the weight is unduly thrust forward onto the ball of the 
 foot. Constant variations in the height of the heel are in 
 themselves a danger because they do not allow time for 
 readjustment of the muscles and ligaments to varied 
 planes of weight bearing. Moreover, these heels are 
 usually extremely small in base, which necessitates a stilt- 
 like balancing by the muscles of the leg. This is a most 
 severe type of exertion and, occurring in that part of the 
 body where the removal of waste products is most slug- 
 gish, it is no wonder that fatigue and strain almost inev- 
 itably ensue. Still further, the shortness of such a heel 
 fails to give support far enough forward under the os 
 calcis and so brings increased strain on the arch. The 
 constricted fore part of the shoe, absolutely eliminating 
 the normal spread and movement of the toes, adds its 
 quota of injury. Occupations requiring long standing or 
 the enforced immobility of the muscles of the foot are a 
 far more frequent cause of flat foot than walking. Cer- 
 tain constitutional conditions predispose to arch trouble, 
 especially the general lack of muscular tone following 
 acute or chronic illness, too rapid growth, or any other 
 condition which lowers bodily tone. 
 
 Diagnosis. Heretofore great emphasis has been placed 
 upon the arch impression, which, when normal, is sup- 
 posed to be broad in the heel and ball of the foot and to 
 show only the outer border between them. A low or 
 fallen arch is indicated by the breadth of the central part 
 of this impression, with sometimes a total obliteration of 
 the curved indentation of the arch in the normal impres-
 
 210 OETHOPEDICS 
 
 son. Impressions are commonly taken by means of water, 
 powder, lamp black, ferric chloride solution, or other sub- 
 stance applied to the soles, the patient standing with feet 
 parallel and about six inches apart, his weight evenly dis- 
 tributed on both feet. The ferric chloride or lamp blacked 
 paper shellacked may serve for permanent record. An 
 ingenious device is the small plate glass stand with slant- 
 ing mirror beneath, showing the pressure imprint of the 
 arch to the surgeon standing in front. I take it that these 
 impressions are of little intrinsic value except when kept 
 in series as a record of the success of the treatment given. 
 The most painful arches I have ever seen have been nat- 
 urally high ones that were beginning to break. On the 
 other hand, the exanodnations of several hundred normal 
 students of physical education have shown, in a great 
 majority of cases, the low strong arch with no untoward 
 symptoms. This fact confirms the conclusions of Major 
 John Ridlon of Chicago, embodied in his advice to sur- 
 geons examining for the service, that the low arch, show- 
 ing good strength of the intrinsic muscles of the foot and 
 without painful symptoms, was much more apt to stand 
 up under forced marching than the very high arch. The 
 pain, with its frequent reference to more or less remote 
 parts of the body, is important. Abduction of the fore 
 part of the foot must be looked for in all types. A ridge 
 of callus along the outer edge of the foot is a sure sign of 
 faulty weight bearing. 
 
 No treatment should be instituted without inverting the 
 foot and passively flexing it to determine the angle of 
 dorsal flexion, which should be ten to fifteen degrees less
 
 FOOT STRAIN 211 
 
 than a right angle. A flexion limited to a right angle or 
 more shows the mnscle-bound foot described by Hibbs. 
 l^roper treatment for that condition, consisting of the 
 fi' stretching of the calf muscle, if possible, if not, by oper- 
 ative lengthening of the Achilles tendon, must be insti- 
 tuted before attempting to treat the arch. These pa- 
 tients receive a strain or stretching of the calf muscle just 
 as the heel leaves the ground in the step, and, in order to 
 decrease the amount of foot flexion necessary, they turn 
 the foot out more and more. This, as before shown, trans- 
 mits the weight more directly onto the arch and aggra- 
 vates the strain upon it. They are given temporary re- 
 lief by certain plates, but, more often, by a higher heel, 
 until the calf muscle takes up the new slack, when the 
 vicious cycle is repeated. In numerous clinics I have seen 
 patients arrive with a bagful of arches of various de- 
 scriptions, when this condition, the root of their trouble, 
 has been overlooked. 
 
 Treatment. Individual cause must first be sought and 
 if possible eliminated. The patient should walk with the 
 foot straight forward. He should wear a heel of moder- 
 ate height, broad and long, especially on the inner side. 
 A wide, sensible heel and a flexible shank is often of ad- 
 vantage. Beginning cases, as of type 1, may often be 
 cured by two or three strappings and a program of exer- 
 cises. The other two types need all the resources at our 
 command. 
 
 Strapping. Strapping is usually done in one of two 
 ways : 1. The partial figure of 8. This is a long doubled 
 strapping starting at the inner border of the tibia, cross-
 
 212 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 ing the front of the ankle and the external malleolus, go- 
 ing under the heel at the anterior border of the os calcis 
 to the internal malleolus, crossing in front of the ankle 
 and attached to the outer side of the leg. This strapping 
 is intended to lift up the front part of the heel and makes 
 no attempt at holding the foot in inversion. It takes little 
 plaster, is quickly and easily applied and is a good type 
 for dispensary work. 
 
 2. The basket strapping. This consists of two sets of 
 six straps each, the shorter set in length from the base of 
 the toes to about an inch over the heel, the other set six 
 inches longer. With the foot flexed to a right angle and 
 inverted the first short strap is placed from the base of 
 the small toe to the back of the outside of the heel. The 
 second and long strap is started just over the dorsum of 
 the foot at the base of the little toe, is carried diagonally 
 under the ball of the foot, back to the anterior part of the 
 arch, up across the front of the ankle, to the outer side of 
 the leg. The third is placed parallel to the first, overlap- 
 ping it one-half in the direction of the arch. The fourth 
 is parallel to the second and slightly posterior to it, so 
 that it overlaps it one-half. The rest are placed in alter- 
 nation, until the arch is covered and supported in its cen- 
 ter by four thicknesses, the result of the interweaving of 
 the two groups. This strapping holds the foot in slight 
 inversion, supports the arch through its entire length, 
 and has been most satisfactory in practice. Such a strap- 
 ping should last from four to seven days and will relieve 
 symptoms while a plate is being made. 
 
 Arch Plates. There are two principles involved in the
 
 FOOT STRAIN 215 
 
 prescribing of arch supports. One is thoroughly to sup- 
 port the arch and relieve the symptoms consequent to 
 strain, the other partially to support and assist the arch 
 muscles in regaining their tone. The first principle is 
 typified by the Whitman plate, which is made from a cast 
 of the foot and so gives perfect support. It consists of 
 an outer flange, preventing displacement of the support, 
 and a high inner flange, which supports the scaphoid and 
 prevents the rolling in of the ankle. I believe this to be 
 the best plate for patients beyond middle life, those dis- 
 tinctly over weight, or those whose feet are rigid. A sec- 
 ond plate, on the principle of a sling or hammock for the 
 arch, improved on greatly by E. H. Arnold of New 
 Haven, gives partial support to the arch by means of two 
 ribbons placed under the arch, one passing over the dor- 
 sum of the foot, the other under the heel, buckling in front 
 of the internal malleolus. This plate allows considerable 
 movement in the foot muscles without abduction of the 
 forefoot, and in young and strong patients, where the 
 ability to regain normal muscular power remains, has 
 given extremely satisfactory results. The leaving off of 
 this support, after it has performed its function, does not 
 usually lead to a renewed relaxation of the arch muscles. 
 The ordinary stock plate neither fits the individual pa- 
 tient, nor assists the return of muscular function, nor 
 gives adequate support and, therefore, is usually a fail- 
 ure. Moreover, nearly every type of arch plate on the 
 market compels the abduction of the forefoot. 
 
 Massage. Frictions of the arch can be done easily by 
 the patient himself and should be followed by stroking.
 
 216 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 This is a valuable means of improving the circulation and 
 relieving fatigue. 
 
 Exercises. Of the many kinds of exercise that have 
 been tried the following are typical examples and, when 
 coupled with the above outlined forms of treatment, will 
 greatly hasten a return to normal: 
 
 1. Stand with the feet parallel and roll out. 
 
 2. Stand with the feet parallel and walk forward on 
 
 the outer edge, keeping the toes flexed as far as 
 possible. 
 
 3. Toe in and rise on toes. 
 
 4. Walk forward on the outer edge, toeing in. 
 
 5. Ground gripper walk. Step forward, flex the toes 
 
 . to the greatest possible extent, and relax. Re- 
 peat step forward with other foot. 
 
 6. Pick up marbles with the toes. 
 
 Anterior arch. The anterior arch extends transversely 
 across the fore part of the foot and is formed by the an- 
 terior ends of the metatarsal bones at right angles to the 
 main arch. It is supported by the transverse metatarsal 
 ligament and the transversus pedis muscle. Strictly 
 speaking, it is not a real arch since it always disappears 
 under weight bearing. 
 
 Cause. Obliteration of the anterior arch, often called 
 ** anterior metatarsalgia,'' is very much more frequently 
 diagnosed now than a few years ago. Its more common 
 occurrence is, in large measure, due to the increased 
 vogue of the thin-soled, high-heeled shoe and pump, and, 
 to some extent, to the increased amount of hard pave-
 
 FOOT STRAIN 217 
 
 ments. With the falling of the main arch there is an in- 
 ternal rotation at the metatarso-phalangeal joint that pro- 
 duces marked ligamental strain. 
 
 Diagnosis. As before stated, the high heel necessitates 
 the crowding forward of an undue amount of weight upon 
 the ball of the foot. The thin sole very frequently curls, 
 in such a way as to form a hollow inside the shoe. Into 
 this the anterior arch is apt to fall, by first spreading the 
 but slightly resistant upper of the shoe, and then drop- 
 ping and assuming the shape of the sole. Nature may at- 
 tempt to build it up by forming, underneath the foot, a 
 pad of callus, which is often the first sign of impending 
 trouble at this point. The pain is sharply localized near 
 the head of the second metatarsal bone and is extremely 
 acute in character. An interesting case in point is that 
 of a young woman of nineteen, who came to the dispen- 
 sary with all the classic symptoms of this condition. Her 
 case had been diagnosed and routine treatment had been 
 applied on several occasions without result. X-ray 
 showed tuberculosis of the distal end of the second meta- 
 tarsal bone of each foot, an extremely rare bilateral man- 
 ifestation of this disease, which was then treated by the 
 appropriate means with good result. I cite this case as 
 an example of the fact that, where the recognized treat- 
 ment of any apparent orthopedic condition has repeat- 
 edly failed, we should exhaust all means at our command 
 before giving the case up or continuing the ineffectual 
 treatment. It must not be forgotten that one may be 
 dealing with a referred pain from longitudinal arch 
 strain.
 
 218 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 Treatment. The treatment of this condition is, first, to 
 eliminate the cause, for instance, by a thick-soled, sen- 
 sible shoe ; by the removal of the of ttimes painful callus 
 by chromic acid or other means ; by the use of strapping, 
 or a support, as well as passively attempting to remold 
 the arch ; by the use of exercises, one being a picking up 
 of marbles or other small objects with the toes. Other 
 exercises, such as flexion and extension and the longi- 
 tudinal arch exercises, help greatly. Sometimes a circu- 
 lar adhesive strapping running several times around the 
 fore part of the foot, the arch being held in a corrected 
 position, will suflSce. A very excellent pad can be made 
 from a circular piece of chamois, a little larger than a 
 silver dollar, surrounding a piece of cotton and securely 
 sewed, so as to be about the size of a half dollar and two 
 or three times as thick. If this is not at hand, a simple 
 pad of cotton will often bring immediate relief when held 
 in place by the above mentioned circular adhesive strap- 
 ping. A laced "collar" with pocket for pad is usefuL 
 
 AKMY TREATMENT OP FOOT AILMENTS 
 
 Strained Foot. The methods of classifying and treat- 
 ing acute and chronic foot strain in the Army is so dif- 
 ferent from that heretofore used in private practice, that 
 to avoid confusion it may be dealt with separately in this 
 section. 
 
 Literature. The latest material will be found in the 
 "War Department Manual, "Minor Foot Ailments" and 
 "Medical Manual No. 4" (Military Orthopaedic Surgery), 
 Colonel Sir Robert Jones ' work on * ' Military Orthopaed-
 
 FOOT STRAIN 219 
 
 ics," Colonel Munson's book, **The Soldier's Foot and 
 the Military Shoe," and the printed lectures of Captain 
 W. J. Merrill of Philadelphia, delivered at the Camp 
 Greenleaf School. 
 
 Viewpoint of Military Orthopedics, It is now the con- 
 sensus of opinion that we are dealing with soldiers dis- 
 abled or potentially disabled (amounting at times to ten 
 per cent of the troops) by (1) weak muscles, (2) acute 
 or chronic foot strain, (3) arthritis or ostitis, secondary 
 to focal or systematic infection. 
 
 Classification. Following to some extent the classifi- 
 cation of Jones, the soldiers ' feet are divided into the fol- 
 lowing types: (1) Weak foot, (2) Flaccid flat foot, (3) 
 Rigid foot: (a) Muscle bound, (b) Contracted, (c) Rigid, 
 (d) Spastic, (e) Claw (first, second and third degrees). 
 
 Anatomy. The weight bearing is done normally when 
 the heel is raised, by the inner three segments of the meta- 
 tarsals, cuneiforms, scaphoid and astragalus. The os cal- 
 cis, cuboid and outer two metatarsals add lateral stability. 
 Movement involving flexion and extension of the foot 
 or, as it is called in the Army, plantar flexion and dorsal 
 flexion takes place on the trochlear surface of the as- 
 tragalus. Lateral movement occurs in the subastraga- 
 loid joint and between the head of that bone and the 
 scaphoid. (This point is important to bear in mind when 
 judging the claims for merit of several styles of shoes 
 which are supposed properly to adduct the foot. In the 
 types I have in mind the foot is not grasped far enough 
 back by the shoe, and the toes are merely crowded out 
 of alignment.) It should never be forgotten that liga-
 
 220 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 ments are non-elastic and non-sensitive, and that the 
 pain of strained foot occurs very often where the liga- 
 ments attach to or pierce the periosteum, which struc- 
 ture is extremely sensitive. 
 
 Methods of Examination. "The examination of the 
 soldier's feet begins at his head." This axiom indicates 
 the close association and importance of bodily posture to 
 foot strain. A clear picture of the normal posture and 
 normal foot must constantly be kept in mind. (Place pa- 
 tient's feet parallel and six inches apart.) Determine the 
 lines of weight bearing. They should pass anteriorly 
 through the center of the patella, the crest of the tibia 
 and the middle of the second toe. In the rear from the 
 center of the popliteal space to just outside the center of 
 the heel. Examine carefully for scars, discolorations, 
 swellings, sweating. Note the condition of the toes 
 corns, callosities, hallux valgus, etc. Manipulate thor- 
 oughly to bring out any restriction of normal motion or 
 roughening of joint surfaces. The following exercises 
 will be of service in the examination: 1. Dorsal flexion 
 (overextension) of the toes, kept straight. 2. Eise on 
 heels, foot dosi-flexed. 3. Rise on toes, avert ankles. 4. 
 Supinate foot (bear weight on outer edge) and flex toes. 
 
 Diagnosis and Treatment. 1. Weak Foot. In this 
 type we find slight pronation. This foot cannot perform 
 the common exercise movements normally. The muscles 
 are untrained and hence liable to break down under un- 
 usual exertion. Any foot which shows the weakness out 
 of proportion to the obvious deformity should be placed 
 in this group. These feet should be treated by proper
 
 FOOT STRAIN 221 
 
 shoes with wedge or Thomas heel if desired, exercises, 
 passive movements, massage and contrast baths. This 
 type must be noted in the history. 
 
 2. Flaccid Flat Foot. There is much obvious deform- 
 ity in this type marked pronation, prominent scaphoid, 
 abducted forefoot, and often flattened transverse arch. 
 The important point is, however, that the foot can go 
 through the standard exercises in a nearly normal man- 
 ner. The treatment is similar to that just given for weak 
 foot. 
 
 3. Advanced Type with Joint and Muscle Complica- 
 tions. 
 
 (a) Muscle Bound. These conditions are brought 
 about by over-use per se, at times but a careful search will 
 generally reveal some constitutional disorder at the root 
 of it. Indeed, Captain Merrill states that in his opinion 
 over ninety-five per cent of these cases are due to infec- 
 tion somewhere in the body. The teeth, tonsils, gastro- 
 intestinal tract, urethra or prostate are the points of pre- 
 dilection. 
 
 We must then seek the focus of infection and if still 
 active, eliminate it. This done, a short rest from strain 
 will allow of nearly normal movements being executed. 
 The treatment by massage, exercises, etc., will then rap- 
 idly restore the foot to full usefulness. 
 
 (b) Contracted. Here there is actual structural short- 
 ening added to muscle spasm. The conditions found in 
 the muscle-bound foot are present in aggravated form. 
 Try to locate the constitutional predisposing cause. 
 Treat as above outlined.
 
 222 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 (c) Rigid. An infectious process has been at work on 
 the joints of the tarsus and mid-tarsus. Gonorrhea is a 
 common cause, supplemented by foot strain. Here pros- 
 tatic massage and medication should be added. If the 
 palliative measures used above do not cause a return of 
 flexibility the patient may be anesthetized, the foot placed 
 over a padded Koenig block and the adhesions broken up. 
 Pl&ce in a cast, the foot being inverted, flexed to 90 de- 
 grees and supinated. It should remain in the cast two or 
 three weeks and then the regular treatment instituted as 
 for the other types heretofore outlined. 
 
 (d) Spastic. In this type we have the added feature 
 of a marked pronation maintained by the spasm of the 
 peronei muscles. These tendons must first be lengthened 
 by tenotomy or better by tenoplasty. The latter is done 
 by two transverse cuts from opposite sides of the tendon 
 extending halfway through and then stretching it until it 
 tears within its sheath, giving the desired and usually 
 permanent lengthening. Put up in plaster and treat as 
 above. * 
 
 (e) Claw. This condition is always progressive, 
 usually rapidly so, and is a cause for rejection from the 
 service. Several varieties are described. First Degree : 
 (a) First toe contracted, (b) the other toes contracted, 
 (c) all contracted. Second Degree : An intensification of 
 the first, with marked varus of the os calcis, callosities 
 and short tendo Achillis. Third Degree (Jones' Fifth 
 Degree) : Intense neuro-vascular changes, with blisters, 
 blebs and gangrene. Sometimes also deep-seated, painful 
 callosities and corns. Treat by the palliative methods
 
 FOOT STRAIN 223 
 
 given with a great deal of dry hot air. The first degree 
 may be relieved by fasciotomy and tenoplasty. Lift up 
 the heads of the metatarsal bones by fixing the extensor 
 tendons to the heads of the phalanges. Occasionally the 
 flexor tendons are fixed to the proximal heads of the 
 phalanges. In the second degree operate at once. In the 
 third degree it may be necessary, because of the poor cir- 
 culation, to amputate the toes or to perform an astraga- 
 lectomy. 
 
 Acute Foot Strain. This condition occurs most often 
 in the new recruit, and is treated by rest in the recum- 
 bent position. The pain, swelling and tenderness rapid- 
 ly subside when massage, passive movements, active 
 movements without weight bearing, and finally walking 
 are resumed as soon as they can be done without pain. 
 In the more severe types strap with double stirrup- 
 strapping or partial figure-of-eight already described, or 
 else place in the corrected position with knee flexed, and 
 apply a plaster of Paris splint, from the toes to the mid- 
 dle of the thigh. 
 
 Chronic Foot Strain. Here the onset is slower. The 
 typical symptoms are the pain and stiffness on first get- 
 ting onto the feet in the morning, which may return 
 toward night with fatigue of the muscles. Change the 
 occupation so as to relieve the feet from strain. Order 
 proper shoes, strapping, or arch if necessary, and treat 
 as above. 
 
 Hammer Toe. Never amputate for this condition ; re- 
 member that every toe in its normal position contributes
 
 224 
 
 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 to the lateral support of the others. If due to habit, it 
 may be corrected by strapping from base to tip, running 
 under the adjoining toes and over the hammer toe. Cut 
 the flexor tendon if necessary. 
 
 Corrective Appliances for Shoes. In the Army no re- 
 movable appliance may be worn by men on active duty. 
 An intensive study of the methods by which the shoe 
 itself may be altered by any cobbler has been most suc- 
 cessful in its results. 
 
 (A) Long inner wedge inserted, between the layers of the sole, to help 
 Bupinate the foot extended under the first four metatarso-phalangeal joints. 
 
 (B) The "D" shaped wedge of Jones for the same purpose. 
 
 (C) The Thomas Heel. "C" the higher (% to % inch) inner side for 
 eversion. **Cr" the flare on the inside of the heel to add stability. 
 
 (D) Jones across bar now inserted between the layers of the sole for 
 anterior arch trouble. 
 
 (E) Steel insert to prevent weak shank from adding to foot strain on 
 rough ground. 
 
 TREATMENT OF MINOR FOOT AILMENTS 
 
 Synovitis of Anterior Tendons. Lace the shoes only 
 with the broad ribbon laces laid flat. At the fifth holes 
 carry lacer through twice to retain snugness below, and 
 prevent the foot going forward in the shoe. Above the 
 fifth eyelets lace loosely and tie behind so puttees do not 
 press on knot. Massage (effleurage upward), rest, bake
 
 FOOT STRAIN 225 
 
 or paint with iodine, for curative treatment. Watch for 
 and treat constitutional disorders. 
 
 Blisters, (a) Small superficial type, open with sterile 
 needle at periphery if desired. Place pad on sticky side 
 of plaster directly over the blister, and strap tightly to 
 promote absorption, (b) Deeply inflamed type. Clean 
 hands and area carefully. Open at periphery with sterile 
 needle or bistoury. Press out all exudate. Paint with 
 iodine or ambrine, pad and strap tightly. Be careful al- 
 ways not to break the skin on top of the blister. 
 
 Abrasions. Disinfect with iodine or alcohol. Pad 
 and strap if caused by puttee or knotted laces, readjust 
 shoe lace as above indicated. 
 
 Fissures. Clean out superficial ones with iodine 21/^ 
 per cent, pad and strap. Cauterize deep ones with silver 
 nitrate, pad and strap. 
 
 Over-Riding Toes. These are not important except for 
 the liability of corn formation, and can be neglected. 
 
 Corns. No man in the service is allowed to have his 
 corns cut or pared. Their deep and irregular under sur- 
 face makes the liability to infection very great. Eemove 
 the cause, which is generally pressure by improperly fit- 
 ting shoes. Clean and dry the corn and apply the stand- 
 ard corn collodion. Dress with gauze and reapply every 
 other night for six to ten days ; after a thorough soaking, 
 the com can then be lifted out in its entirety by some 
 blunt instrument. Fulguration will usually cure. 
 
 Soft Corns. Clean carefully, apply corn salve, cov- 
 ered by a pledget of wet gauze, bring the toes together
 
 226 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 and strap them; bathing the feet frequently with cold 
 water and proper shoes will prevent their formation. 
 
 Callosities. Soak with water, scrape and apply com 
 salve. Chromic acid or excision may be necessary for the 
 removal of deep ones. 
 
 Warts. These growths are of great importance, as the 
 pain from even a very small one may cause foot strain in 
 the effort to avoid weight bearing on them. They are es- 
 sentially fungi, have hard glistening surfaces and dark 
 spots in them. Ring them with vaseline or other grease 
 and paint with glacial, acetic or nitric acid. Dress and 
 strap, treating the same number of times as directed for 
 corns. Fulgurate with high-frequency current if neces- 
 sary. 
 
 Sweating Feet. This condition is a great source of 
 danger to the soldier. Daily cold water baths should be 
 used. Rub with 10 per cent salicylic acid in alcohol. 
 Dry and apply 1-1000 potassium permanganate, 10 per 
 cent formalin, or 25 per cent aluminum chloride. The 
 sock may be dipped in 1-2000 bichloride and dried. Treat 
 daily with foot liniment. 
 
 Chilblains. In mild cases stimulate by friction, foot 
 liniment and frequent changes of dry woolen socks. The 
 severe cases demand only cold applications, rest and ele- 
 vation. No massage or heat should be used. 
 
 Trench Foot. The phenomenon is similar to the effect 
 of frost-bite and was formerly common. When proper 
 precautions are taken it is largely preventable at the 
 present time. The cause is cold, wet and interference 
 with the circulation. The onset is gradual, characterized
 
 FOOT STRAIN 227 
 
 by chilling and numbness. There is no pain at first. 
 Later on swelling of the feet and marked pain develop 
 where the blood still circulates sluggishly just above the 
 affected area. Treatment is aimed largely at prevention 
 by cleanliness, oiling and several pairs of clean dry 
 socks, with the outer coverings of the foot and leg loosely 
 applied. It was aimed to keep the trenches as dry as 
 possible, the feet and toes in constant motion, and not to 
 allow the shrinking of wet leggins to constrict the leg. 
 Foot coverings were removed, dried with hot pebbles or 
 oats, the feet rubbed and again covered. Warm drinks 
 and dry garments are factors of importance in preven- 
 tion. Treat by elevation with exposure to sun and air. 
 Electric light baths followed by massage when the 
 oedema lessens. Aspirate bullae if present, and give anti- 
 tetanic serum if the feet have been abraded. Morphine 
 is indicated where the pain is severe. 
 
 Shoe Fitting. No study of foot ailments is complete 
 without a consideration of that greatest of all factors in 
 their avoidance, namely, proper shoes. 
 
 The Munson last with its straight inner line and broad 
 toe provides the best shoe for men. In the Army the 
 recruit is fitted as follows : He stands on the rule on his 
 left foot, with forty pounds on his back. His foot length 
 is then determined and he is given the second larger size. 
 The width is determined by a scale from the circumfer- 
 ence of the fore foot at its broadest part. After six 
 months his strengthened foot muscles require refitting of 
 his shoes. 
 
 When the shoe is on and his weight all on the left foot,
 
 228 
 
 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 PRESCRIPTIONS 
 
 Com Collodion 
 
 Salicylic Acid 11 parts 
 
 Ext. Cannabis In- 
 dica 2 parts 
 
 Alcohol. 95 per cent. 10 parts 
 
 Flexible Col- 
 lodion ad 100 parts 
 
 Stimulating Limment 
 
 Chloroform 1 part 
 
 Spirits of Tur- 
 pentine 31/2 parts 
 
 Olive Oil 31/2 parts 
 
 Oily Liniment for Sweating 
 
 Methyl Salicylate 
 or Oil Wintergreen. . . 2 oz. 
 
 Carbolic Acid 1 dr. 
 
 Camphor, 
 Chloral, 
 
 Menthol aa 2 dr. 
 
 Spirits of Turpentine . . 4 dr. 
 Alberine Oil q.s. ad 8 oz. 
 
 Com Sc^ve 
 
 Salicylic Acid 40 parts 
 
 Vaseline 30 parts 
 
 Lanolin 30 parts 
 
 Aqueous Liniment for 
 Sweating 
 
 Salicylic Acid 3 dr. 
 
 Camphor, 
 
 Carbolic Acid aa 30 gr. 
 
 Dissolve in Alcohol 95 
 per cent., add 3 oz. 
 Glycerine 1 oz. 
 
 Ext. Hamamelis 4 oz. 
 
 Alum, pulv 4 dr. 
 
 Aquae q.s. ad 12 oz. 
 
 there should be spare length of about the breadth of the 
 forefinger in front of the longest toe. The leather over 
 the dorsum should just wrinkle but not enough to be 
 grasped by the fingers.
 
 Chapter XTV 
 
 BEACES AND CASTS 
 
 Braces. A good generalization on the theory of the 
 treatment of orthopedic defects by braces is hard to find 
 in the literature. The descriptions of use of different 
 types of braces in the various deformities are scattered 
 throughout the text books, and the application of the 
 same general principles in each case is often obscure. 
 This failure to grasp the fundamental principles has been 
 evident in some of our army orthopedic instruction as is 
 stated by Major R. W. Lovett, of Boston. He says: 
 ''The student as a rule is taught that a certain splint is 
 used for tuberculosis of the hip, another for Pottos dis- 
 ease, another for club foot and a fourth for flat foot. He 
 does not connect these, nor does he understand their prin- 
 ciples very well, and as a rule speedily forgets all about 
 them except, perhaps, the name. It has been found pos- 
 sible to get some knowledge, apparently more permanent, 
 into the minds of the students by a different method of 
 approach. It is taught that apparatus may be of wood, 
 plaster, iron, tin, leather and other materials; that 
 crutches are apparatus and so are ham splints ; that ap- 
 paratus should be used for a definite mechanical purpose, 
 and that if the student does not understand what he is 
 
 trying to do, he will probably not fit satisfactory braces ; 
 
 229
 
 230 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 that apparatus is used for four purposes: (1) fixation, 
 (2) traction, (3) support or protection, and (4) correction 
 of deformity. A case is shown, its pathology analyzed, 
 and its mechanical needs, if any, are formulated. It may 
 require the application of one of the four purposes de- 
 scribed above, and if so the student is required to work 
 out the mechanical needs without calling apparatus by 
 name. He is asked to work out in wire or paper or on the 
 blackboard the theory of the required apparatus. He is 
 then requested to state practically how it could be done in 
 plaster, leather or metal, and he is then made familar 
 with the accepted splint to meet that need. The response 
 of students to this method of instruction has in this de* 
 p^rtment been most satisfactory. ' ' * 
 
 The same broad treatment of the question of braces 
 and splints was being taught by Major E. S. Geist, M. C, 
 U. S. A., at Camp Greenleaf . A set of simple tools, which 
 he has devised and called the ** Oglethorpe Kit," with 
 bench and vise, was sufficient for the improvisation of 
 many splints from wire, which he found to be a most use- 
 ful material. For the heavier braces a blacksmith's tools 
 are necessary. Provision for lengthening each type of 
 the various braces here described should always be made, 
 except in the case of adults. 
 
 Arch braces are described under the topic of flat foot. 
 
 Talipes Calcaneus. This brace consists of two lateral 
 bars curved forward to about an angle of 130 degrees at 
 the external malleolus, joined in front and below by a thin 
 
 * A System of Orthopedic Instruction, American Journal of Orthopedic 
 Surgery, August, 1918, page 487.
 
 BRACES AND CASTS 231 
 
 eole plate and above by a leather cuff. Complicated by 
 valgus or varus, the deformity is checked by a plate under 
 the sole and over the edge of the foot. 
 
 Knee. For arthritis, or ligament strain about the knee 
 joint, the best brace is a simple hinge, locked against over- 
 extension and supported by a broad leather cuff on th^ 
 tipper curve of the calf and lower half of the thigh. 
 
 For tubercular knee, the best brace is the Thomas 
 splint, consisting of two side bars extending below the 
 shoe and joined by a cross bar, which acts as a stilt. It is 
 joined together above by a padded ring, which fits snugly 
 at the upper part of the thigh, this ring so inclined that 
 the weight is evenly distributed. Certain common modi- 
 fications allow for active extension of the knee by means 
 of moleskin plaster and buckles and various other me- 
 chanical means. 
 
 The caliper splint of Ridlon and Jones is used in the 
 recovery stage, and is so arranged that a gradually in- 
 creasing amount of weight can be borne upon the foot. 
 
 The bow-leg brace consists of a strong inside column 
 and, occasionally, a lighter external one with cross bar 
 through the heel of the shoe. There is a hinge at the 
 ankle joint and a posterior band above, curved obliquely 
 upward and outward to the great trochanter. A short, 
 hinged, vertical piece from this point is connected with a 
 waist strap. Two broad cuffs on the thigh and calf exert 
 traction toward the strong inner bar. There is a modifi- 
 cation of this long brace by Napier and a short Knight 
 bow-leg brace. 
 
 The knock-knee brace of the Thomas and other types
 
 232 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 are very similar, with the strong supporting column 
 hinged at ankle and hip on the outer side. There is not 
 usually an inner support. 
 
 Leg. Infantile leg braces are similar to the last two 
 types described with the exception that they have two 
 firm lateral supports usually hinged at the hip and at the 
 knee, with a lock which the patient may manipulate. A 
 hinge at the ankle is locked against extension, and an 
 arch plate fits inside the shoe. 
 
 Bach. Back braces, for use largely in tuberculous 
 spine, consist of two strong bands of steel shaped to the 
 contour of the spine from the bony pelvis to the neck, with 
 a semi-circular steel hip band and a front canvas apron, 
 cut to fit the chest and abdomen firmly. A head support 
 by means of a ring around the chin or a jury-mast over 
 the head with a sling is indicated where surgical lesions 
 are present. 
 
 Casts. Plaster-of-Paris as a means for securing well 
 fitted support, protection and extension, is worthy of a 
 wider use in general practice than it has yet attained. Its 
 ease of application, quick setting and the convenience 
 with which it can be carried are greatly in its favor. 
 
 Plaster bandages are easily prepared at home by cut- 
 ting long strips of coarse muslin or crinoline to the de- 
 sired width of two, four, or six inches. White plaster is 
 best, but gray, coarse plaster is serviceable. It should be 
 rubbed thoroughly into the meshes of the cloth, which is 
 tightly rolled as you go along, and then kept in a moisture 
 proof metal or glass container. "Wide bandages when well 
 rolled are easily cut by a plaster knife.
 
 BRACES AND CASTS 233 
 
 It is impossible to avoid some spreading of the plaster 
 in rapid work, so the clothing and floor should be prop- 
 erly protected. The skin should be cleansed with warm 
 water and soap, or alcohol, dried and then powdered. 
 Any abraded surface should be covered with sterile gauze 
 and later a window cut through the cast at that point. 
 The part to be incased should be wrapped in some soft 
 material, cotton roller bandage, a thin layer of cotton, 
 jersey or other material. A felt jacket may be used for 
 the body. Joints and points of pressure need extra 
 padding. Crushed tissue paper or even newspaper is of 
 service here. The bandage is then immersed in warm 
 water for twenty or thirty seconds or until bubbling has 
 ceased, when it should be picked up with the open ends 
 against the palms of the hands, and excess of water 
 gently squeezed out. This hold prevents undue loss of 
 plaster. The surgeon should protect his hands if possi- 
 ble, with cheap rubber gloves. If this is not possible pro- 
 tect the under side of the nails by filling them with soap 
 or cold cream. Plaster is easily removed by the use of 
 a little sugar or com meal. 
 
 The part is held in the desired position by an assistant 
 until after setting is fairly complete, the bandages being 
 applied in the same manner as in simple bandaging. It is 
 often desirable to increase the rigidity of the cast by 
 rubbing in dry plaster scattered over the surface during 
 the application. Another means of strengthening a weak 
 point is by doubling the bandage back and forth and over- 
 laying it again with circular strips. 
 
 In club foot and several other conditions there is
 
 234 ORTHOPEDICS 
 
 plenty of time to secure the correction after the cast has 
 been applied, maintaining it during setting. With an in- 
 delible pencil, while the cast is still wet, the upper and 
 lower edges and any desired windows can be marked and 
 then cut. Some surgeons insert at the beginning a sheet 
 of tin or other substance upon which to cut down when the 
 time comes for removal. With care and a little skill in 
 cutting this is usually unnecessary. Two vertical and 
 parallel cuts a quarter of an inch apart, with the free use 
 of vinegar, in an old cast make removal fairly easy. All 
 wounds are dressed through sufficiently large windows. 
 The extremities, toes and finger tips should, when pos- 
 sible, be exposed as a guide to the condition of the cir- 
 culation under the cast. X-rays are usually more read- 
 able through casts than through many of the common 
 prepared splints. See that the edges are rounded and 
 well padded in such places as, for instance, the axilla.
 
 GLOSSARY 
 
 TISSUl! ; NAMa PERTAININQ TO 
 
 arthral joint 
 
 cardiac heart 
 
 carpal . wrist 
 
 colonic large intestine 
 
 enteric ....... small intestine 
 
 gastric . stomach 
 
 genu knee 
 
 hallux great toe 
 
 hemal, hsemal hlood 
 
 jnyo muscle 
 
 nephric kidney 
 
 neural nerve 
 
 osteo bone 
 
 pedal fooi 
 
 synovial membrane (joint) 
 
 talipes foot deformity 
 
 tarsal ankle 
 
 teno-synovial membrane (tendon) 
 
 POSITIONS 
 
 abduction owO'V from the body 
 
 adduction toward body 
 
 calcaneus ^^ ivalking 
 
 equinous *o viking 
 
 epi 
 
 supra 
 
 . above 
 235
 
 236 OETHOPEDIOS 
 
 "below 
 
 infra 
 sub 
 
 end endo inner 
 
 peri outer 
 
 prone /oice or pcdm down 
 
 supine face or palm up 
 
 'I ... aiway from center of body 
 
 peripheral J 
 
 proximal toward center of body 
 
 cervical neck vertebrce seven 
 
 I chest vertebrcB twelve 
 
 dorsal j 
 
 lumbar abdominal vertebrce five 
 
 valgus turned in 
 
 varus turned out 
 
 SUFFIXES 
 
 algia . ,' pojln 
 
 eetomy to cut out 
 
 itis inflammation, of 
 
 osteomy to leave opening into 
 
 otomy to cut into 
 
 SPINE 
 
 kyphosis increased dorsal curve 
 
 lordosis increased lumbar curve 
 
 scoliosis rotary lateral curve 
 
 torticollis ...... urry neck
 
 INDEX 
 
 Abbott jacket, 129 
 Abrasion on feet, 225 
 Abscess, bone, 149 
 Acromioclavicixlar joint, dislocation 
 
 of, 153 
 Acromion process, fractures of, 154 
 Adhesions, after treatment, 139 
 
 breaking down, 70 
 Ankle, after treatment, 203 
 
 complications, 203 
 
 dislocations, 203 
 
 fractures, 202 
 Pott's, 202 
 
 sprains, 139 
 
 strains, 139 
 
 Ankylosis, best position in ankle, 
 202 
 
 elbow, 174 
 
 hip, 192 
 
 knee, 198 
 
 shoulder, 165 
 
 Apparatus, gymnastic, 19 
 
 occupational therapy, 82, 85 
 
 physiotherapy, 25, 30 
 
 Arm, exercises, infantile, 98, 99, 
 
 100 
 general, 19 
 
 joint mobilization, 20 
 Arch, anterior, 216 
 
 exercises for, 216 
 
 hammock, 215 
 
 steel, 212 
 
 Arthritis, acute rheumatic, 142 
 
 atrophic, 141 
 
 deformans, 140 
 
 degenerative, 140 
 
 gonorrheal, 144 
 
 hypertrophic, 141 
 
 osteoarthritis, 143 
 
 proliferative, 140 
 
 rheumatoid, 140 
 ' spondylitis, 140 
 
 syphilitic, 144 
 
 toxic, 140 
 
 traumatic, 139 
 
 tubercular, 142 
 Articular cartilages, 135, 197 
 
 Articular injuries, 135 
 
 operation, 136 
 
 treatment, 136 
 Astragalus fractures, 203 
 
 dislocations, 203 
 
 Back, massage of, 53 
 
 Baking, physiological effects, 27 
 
 technique, 28 
 Bandaging, 233 
 Baths, cabinet, 30 
 
 contrast, 34 
 
 electric, 30 
 
 whirlpool, 34 
 Bone, diseases of, 146 
 
 osteitis, 149 
 
 osteomalacia, 150 
 
 osteomyelitis, 149 
 
 periostitis, 146 
 
 repair in, 146 
 
 rickets, 92 
 
 tuberculosis, 151 
 Bow-legs, 231 
 Braces, 229 
 Brachial plexus, 104 
 
 injuries to, 104 
 
 Bradford frame, 181 
 Bunion, 220 
 Bursitis, 71 
 
 Callosities, 226 
 
 Cartilage {See Articular), 135, 147 
 
 Cell, galvanic, 39 
 
 Chilblains, 226 
 
 Circumflex nerve paralysis, 104 
 
 Club-foot, 91 
 
 Contracture, 14 
 
 Corns, 225 
 
 Coxa vara, 92 
 
 Deltoid-paralysis, 104 
 
 Diathermy, 44 
 
 Dislocation, acromioclavicular, 153 
 
 ankle, 203 
 
 elbow, 170 
 
 hip, 186 
 
 237
 
 238 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Dislocation, knee, 197 
 
 shoulder, 157 
 
 vertebrae, 110 
 
 wrist, 178 
 Douche, Scottish, 34 
 Drop-foot, 105 
 Drop-wrist, 103 
 
 Effleurage, technique, 54 
 
 uses, 57 
 
 Elbow, adhesions, 169 
 
 ankylosis, 173 
 
 dislocations, 170 
 
 fractures about, 169 
 Exercise, arch, 216 
 
 athletic training, 4 
 
 fatigue in, 2 
 
 relation to age, 9 
 
 relation to sex, 8 
 
 safeguards, 4 
 
 settiQg-up drill, 17, 18 
 
 spinal curvature, 117, 118 
 
 types, 9 
 
 endurance, 9 
 
 skill, 9 
 
 speed, 9 
 
 strength, 9 
 
 Faradism, 40 
 
 Fatigue, 10 
 
 Femur, fractures of lower third, 
 
 194 
 
 middle third, 193 
 
 upper third, 192 
 
 Fibula, fractures of lower third, 
 
 202 
 
 middle third, 201 
 
 upper third, 198 
 
 Fixation, plaster, 222 
 
 splints, 230 
 
 Foot, anterior metatarsalgia, 216 
 
 deformities of, 219 
 
 flat-foot, 205 
 
 acute strain, 223 
 
 chronic strain, 223 
 
 flaccid flat, 221 
 
 plates for, 212 
 
 rigid, 222 
 
 shoes, modifications of, 224 
 
 spastic, 222 
 
 Fractures, after treatment, 69 
 
 carpus, 178 
 
 clavicle, 152 
 
 Colles, 177 
 
 complications, 149 
 
 femur, 192 
 
 Fractures, fibula, 202 
 
 foot, 204 
 
 hand, 178 
 
 humerus, 161 
 
 olecranon, 169 
 
 patella, 195 
 
 Pott's, 202 
 
 radius, 177 
 
 scapula, 153 
 
 semilunar, 197 
 
 spine, 110 
 
 tarsus, 203 
 
 tibia, 198 
 
 ulna, 177 
 
 Frame, abduction, 184 
 
 Bradford, 181 
 
 suspension, 181 
 Friction, 61 
 
 Galvanism, 39 
 Graft, bone, 108 
 Gymnastics, medical, 10 
 
 re-educational, 99 
 
 Hallux rigidus; operations for, 223 
 
 valgus, 222 
 
 Hammer toe, 223 
 
 Health, dependence on muscle func- 
 tion, 1 
 Heart, exercises, 7 
 High frequency, 43 
 Hibbs' table, 192 
 Hip, abduction, splint for, 184 
 
 ankylosis, position for, 186 
 
 braces, 232 
 
 coxa vara, 93 
 
 dislocations of, 186 
 
 fractures of, 191 
 Hydrotherapy, physiological effect 
 
 of, 29 
 
 technique, 33 
 
 types of baths, 34 
 Hyperaemia, active, 27 
 passive (Bier's), 28 
 
 Ionization, 40 
 Ischemic paralysis, 177 
 
 Joints, ankylosis, positions for, 202 
 
 flail, 136 
 
 injuries to, 135 
 
 ' massage of, 139 
 
 mobilization of, 138 
 
 Knee, adhesions, 195 
 
 ankylosis, 19^
 
 INDEX 
 
 239 
 
 Knee, bursitis, 71 
 
 dislocations, 197 
 
 fractures about, 195, 197 
 
 internal injuries, 197 
 
 rupture of crucial ligaments, 198 
 
 semilunar cartilages, 197 
 
 synovitis, 69 
 Knock-knees, 92 
 Kjphosii, exercises, 117, 118 
 
 Leg, exercises, 101 
 Ligaments, injuries, 136 , 
 
 treatment, 138 > 
 Lordosis, exercises, 120, 121 
 
 Massage, contraindications, 63 
 
 indications, 54 
 
 technique, 54-62 
 
 types, 46 
 Mechanotherapy, 131 
 Median nerve, 104 
 Metatarsalgia, 216 
 Mirror, use in exercise, 114 
 Movements, passive, assistive, aetire, 
 
 resistive, 13 
 Muscle atrophy, 103, 104 
 
 balance, 14 
 
 contracture, 14 
 
 degeneration, 177 
 
 electrical stimulation, 39 
 
 fatigue, 17 
 
 massage, 57 
 
 tonus, 14 
 Musculocutaneous, 104 
 Musculospiral, 104 
 
 Nauheim exercises, 10 
 Nerve injuries, central, 93 
 
 peripheral, 103, 104 
 
 scarg, adherent to, 105 
 
 Occupational therapy, 79 
 Osteitis, 149 
 Osteogenesis, 150 
 Osteomalacia, 150 
 
 Pain, massage, guide, 49 
 
 passive movement, guide, 13 
 
 scars, 62 
 Paralysis, flaccid, 97, 103 
 
 infantile, 97 
 
 spastic, 93 
 
 traumatic, 104 
 Passive movements, 13 
 Peronei, transplantation of, 103 
 
 Petrissage, 57 
 
 Phalanges, dislocation, 178, 204 
 
 fractures, 178, 204 
 Physiotherapy, 27 
 
 Plaster of paris, application, 232, 233 
 
 preparation, 233 
 
 Popliteal nerve, paralysis of, 104 
 Pott's disease, 107 
 Prescriptions, foot ailments, 228 
 Pulley weights, exercises, 17-24 
 
 Badiant heat, 27 
 Reconstruction, 10 
 Ee-education, 97 
 
 muscle, 10 
 
 physical, 17, 222 
 
 vocational, 79 
 Bheumatism, 140 
 Eickets, 92 
 
 Sacroiliac lesions, 112 
 
 strapping, 112 
 
 Scar tissue, contractures, 62 
 
 massage, 61 
 
 pain in, 62 
 
 stretching of, 13 
 Scoliosis, braces, 129 
 
 diagnosis, 127 
 
 exercise programs, 130 
 
 prognosis, 130 
 
 types, 123 
 
 Septic wounds, Carrel-Dakin, 150 
 
 massage, 57 
 
 violet ray, 44 
 
 Shoe, fitting, 227 
 
 modifications of for foot deform- 
 
 ities, 224 
 Shoulder, ankylosis, position for, 
 165 
 
 dislocations, 157 
 
 exercises for deformities, 18 
 
 fractures about, 162 
 Sinusoidal current, 43 
 Spine, arthritis, 140 
 
 braces, 232 
 
 casts, 232 
 
 dislocations, 110 
 
 fractures, 110 
 
 kyphosis, 113 
 
 lordosis, 119 
 
 torticollis, 110 
 
 tuberculosis of, 107 
 
 Splints {See also Braces), caliper, 
 192, 231 
 
 humeral extension, 166 
 
 Jones' cockup, 105
 
 240 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Splints, Thomas leg, 231 
 
 wire cockup, 103 
 Sprains, diagnosis, 137 
 
 treatment, 138 
 Static electricity, 44 
 Strapping, back, 112 
 
 flat foot, 211 
 
 metatarsalgia, 216 
 
 sprains, 138 
 Stumps, massage of, 75 
 
 preparation for prothesis, 76 
 Sun lamp, 44 
 
 Synovitis, treatment of, 69, 224 
 
 Tapotement, contraindications, 58 
 
 technique, 61 
 Tarsus, injuries to, 203 
 
 treatment of, 203 
 Tendons, massage of, 68 
 
 tenoplasty, 222 
 
 tenosynovitis, 69 
 
 tenotomy, 222 
 
 transplantation, 103 
 Thermolight, 27 
 Thermaphore, 27 
 
 Thomas heel, 224 
 Thomas splint, arm, 161 
 
 leg, 231 
 
 Tibial nerve, paralysis of, anterior, 
 
 105 
 
 posterior, 105 
 
 Trench foot, 226 
 
 Tuberculosis {See Arthritis and 
 
 Bone), 142, 151 
 
 Ulnar nerve, paralysi* of, 104 
 
 Varicose veins, massage of, 64 
 Vertebrae (See Spine), 106 
 Vibration, manual, 61 
 
 mechanical, 61 
 Vocational reconstruction, 106 
 Volkmann's contracture, 177 
 
 Whirlpool bath, 34 
 Whitman arch plate, 215 
 Wrist, drop, 103 
 
 exercises for, 103 
 
 injuries, 177 
 
 treatment, 177 
 
 Paul B. Hoeber, 67-71 East 69th Street, New York
 
 HOEBER'S 
 MEDICAL MONOGRAPHS
 
 MEDICAL MONOGRAPHS 
 
 Published by 
 
 PAUL B. HOEBER 
 
 67'69'7i East 59th St., New York 
 
 This catalogue comprises only our own publications. It will 
 be noticed that particular care has been exercised in the selec- 
 tion of Monographs of timely interest. 
 
 We are always glad to consider the publication of new and 
 original medical works. Correspondence with authors is in- 
 vited. 
 
 Owing to the constant changes in manufacturing costs, prices 
 in this catalogue are subject to change without notice. 
 
 ADAM: Asthma and Its Radical Treatment. By James 
 Adam, m.a., m.d., f.r.c.p.s. Hamilton. Dispensary Aural Sur- 
 geon, Glasgow Royal Infirmary. 
 8vo. Qoth, viii+184 pages, Illust net $1.75 
 
 ADLER: Compendium of Histo-Pathological Technic. By 
 Emma H. Adler. Formerly Technician Pathological Labora- 
 tory, Presbyterian Hospital, New York. 
 12mo. Cloth net $125 
 
 ADLER: Primary Malignant Growths of the Lungs and 
 Bronchi. By I. Adler, a.m., m.d.. Prof. Emeritus New York 
 Polyclinic, Consulting Physician, German, Beth-Israel, Har 
 Moriah, People's and Montefiore Hospitals. 
 8vo. Cloth, xii4-325 Pgs. 16 Halftone PI., 1 Colored. nef $2.50 
 
 AMERICAN JOURNAL OF ROENTGENOLOGY, THE. 
 Official Organ of the American Roentgen Ray Society. Edited 
 by H. M. Imboden, m.d.. New York. 
 Published monthly. Vol. VI, No. 1, Jan., 1919. . .$6.00 per year. 
 
 ANATOMICAL CHARTS, {^ce BLAINE.) 
 
 ANNALS OF MEDICAL HISTORY. Edited by Francis 
 R. Packard, m.d. Associate Editors : Drs. Harvey Gushing, 
 George Dock, Fielding H. Garrison, Howard A. Kelly, Sir 
 William Osier, William Pepper, Lewis S. Pilcher, David Ries- 
 man, Charles Singer and Edward C. Streeter. 
 Volume I (1917-1918) 441 pages, well indexed, in parts as 
 published, $6.00 ; Bound in cloth, net $8.50 ; Bound in Half Mo- 
 rocco, net $10.00; Bound in Morocco, net $12.00. Volume II 
 (in course of publication) $6.00. 
 Subscription, per year $6.00 
 
 ARMSTRONG: I. K. Therapy, with Special Reference to 
 Tuberculosis. By W. E. M. Armstrong, m.a., m.d., Dublin. 
 Bacteriologist to Cent. Lond. Ophthalmic Hosp., Late Asst. 
 
 I
 
 2 HOEBER'S MEDICAL MOHOGRAPHS 
 
 in Inoculation Dept., St. Mary's Hosp., Paddington, W. 
 8vo. Cloth, x+93 pages, lllust net $1.50 
 
 BACH: Ultra-Violet Light by Means of the Alpine Sun 
 Lamp. By Hugo Bach, m.d., Bad Elster, Germany. Author- 
 ized Transl. from German. 
 12mo. Cloth, 114 pages, lllust net $1.00 
 
 BARRINGER, JANE WAY AND FAILLA: Radium Ther- 
 apy in Cancer at the Memorial Hospital. (See Janeway, 
 Barringer and Failla.) 
 
 BIGG: Indigestion, Constipation and Liver Disorder. By 
 G. Sherman Bigg, Fellow of the Royal College of Surgeons; 
 Fellow of the Royal Institute of Public Health; Late Surgeon 
 Captain, Army Medical Staff; Surgeon Allahabad, India. 
 12 mo. Cloth, viii-j-168 pages net $1.50 
 
 BLAINE: Anatomical Charts, especially arranged by Ed- 
 ward S. Blaine, m.d., for the graphic recording of roentgen 
 or surgical findings. These show (a) complete skeleton, dorsal, 
 ventral and left and right side views also with outline of 
 internal organs in color, if desired; (b) skeleton of head, 
 dorsal, ventral, left and right side, and top views, enlarged; 
 (c) Torso, dorsal, ventral, left and right side views, enlarged 
 also with outline of internal organs in color; (d) upper ex- 
 tremities, enlarged view; (e) lower extremities, enlarged 
 view. These charts will be made up to meet the individual 
 needs of the specialist or general practitioner. 
 
 BLAND-SUTTON: Tumours: Innocent and Malignant. 
 Their Clinical Characters and Appropriate Treatment. By 
 Sir John Bland-Sutton, ll.d., f.r.c.s.. Surgeon to, and Chair- 
 man of the Cancer Investigation Committee of the Middlesex 
 Hospital, Sixth edition. 
 8vo. Cloth, ix-f790 pages, with 338 lllust net $7.50 
 
 BRAUN AND FRIESNER: Cerebellar Abscess: Its Eti- 
 ology, Pathology, Diagnosis & Treatment. (See Friesner & 
 Braun.) 
 
 BROCKBA'NK: The Diagnosis and Treatment of Heart 
 Disease. Practical Points for Students and Practitioners. 
 By E. M. Brockbank, m.d., (Vict), f.r.c.p., Hon. Phys. Royal 
 Infirmary, Manchester, Clin. Lecturer Diseases of the Heart, 
 Dean of Clin. Instruction, University of Manchester. 
 12mo. Cloth, 3d Edition, 148 pages, lllust net $2.00 
 
 BRUCE: Lectures on Tuberculosis to Nurses. Based on 
 a course delivered to the Queen Victoria Jubilee Nurses. By 
 Oliver Bruce, Joint Tuberculosis Officer, County of Essex. 
 12 mo. Cloth, 124 pages, lllust net $1.00 
 
 BRUNTON: Therapeutics of the Circulation. By Sir Lau- 
 der Brunton, m.d., d.sc, ll.d. Edin., ll.d., Aberd., f.r.c.p., f.r.s. 
 Consulting Physician to St. Bartholomew's Hospital. Second 
 Edition, Entirely Revised. 
 Qoth, xxiv-|-536 pages, 110 lllust net $2.50
 
 HOEBER'S MEDICAL MOXOCRAPHS 3 
 
 BULKLEY: Cancer: Its Cause and Treatment, Volume 
 I. By L. Duncan Bulkley. 
 8vo. Cloth, 272 pages net $1.50 
 
 BULKLEY: Cancer: Its Cause and Treatment, Volume II. 
 By L. Duncan Bulkley. 
 8vo. Cloth, 272 pages net $1.50 
 
 BULKLEY: Compendium of Diseases of the Skin. Based 
 on an analysis of thirty thousand consecutive cases. With 
 a Therapeutic Formulary, by L. Duncan Bulkley, a.m., m.d. 
 Physician to the New York Skin and Cancer Hospital; Con- 
 sulting Physician to the New York Hospital. 
 8vo. Cloth, xviii+286 pages net $2.00 
 
 BULKLEY: Diet and Hygiene in Diseases of the Skin. 
 By L. Duncan Bulkley. 
 8vo. Cloth, xvi+194 pages net $2.00 
 
 BULLETIN: See Neurological Bulletin. 
 
 CARLETON: The Seriousness of Venereal Disease. By 
 Sprague Carleton, M.D., F.A.C.S., Special Publication. Second 
 Edition. 
 
 12mo. 67 pages, 26 lUust. Boards net 75c 
 
 Flexible cloth net 50c 
 
 CARREL AND DEHELLY: The Treatment of Infected 
 Wounds. By A. Carrel and G. Dehelly. Authorized Trans- 
 lation from the French by Herbert Child, m. d.. Formerly Sur- 
 geon, French Red Cross, Capt. r.a.m.c. (Ty.) with an Intro- 
 duction by Sir Anthony A. Bowlby, F.R.C.S., Temporary Sur- 
 geon General, Army Medical Service. Adopted by U. S. 
 Army. Second Edition. 
 12mo. Cloth, 265 pages, 114 Illust net $2.50 
 
 CARREL AND DUMAS: Technic of the Irrigation Treat- 
 ment of Woimds by the Carrel Method. By J. Dumas, and 
 Anne Carrel. Authorized translation by Adrian V. S. Lam- 
 bert, M.D., Acting Professor of Surgery, College of Physicians 
 and Surgeons (Columbia University), New York City. In- 
 troduction by W. W. Keen, m.d., ll.d., f.r.c.s. (Hon.) 
 12mo. Qoth, 90 pages, 11 pi net $1.25 
 
 CAUTLEY: The Diseases of Infants and Children. By 
 Edmund Cauti-ey, m.d., Cantab., f.r.c.p., Lond. Senior Physi- 
 cian to the Belgrave Hospital for Children, etc. 
 Large 8vo. Cloth, 1042 pages net $8.00 
 
 CHARAKA: Proceedings of the Charaka Club. Vols. Ill, 
 IV, V. Vol. V containing twelve selections relating to ancient, 
 medieval and modern phases of medicine and surgery. 
 8vo. Boards, 101 pages, 16 Illust., per volume net $4.00 
 
 COLLINS: Neurological Clinics. Exercises in the Diagno- 
 sis of Mental Diseases of the Nervous System as discussed at 
 the Neurological Institute, New York City. Edited by Joseph 
 Collins. M.D. 
 8vo. Cloth. About 240 pages, with Illust net $3.00
 
 4 HOEBEKS MEDICAL MONOGRAPHS 
 
 CONTRIBUTIONS TO MEDICAL AND BIOLOGICAL 
 RESEARCH: Dedicated to Sir William Osler, in honor of 
 his seventieth birthday, July 12, 1919, by his pupils and co- 
 workers. Special publication under the auspices of the Osier 
 Anniversary Volume Committee. 
 
 Two volumes ; 1300 pages, 125 Illust., including one steel en- 
 graving of Sir William Osier, and 5 colored pi. Sold only by 
 subscription. 
 
 COOKE: The Position of the X-Rays in the Diagnosis and 
 Prognosis of Pulmonary Tuberculosis. By W. E. Cooke, 
 
 M.B., M.R.C.P.E., D.P.H. (Lond.). 
 
 8vo. Cloth, Illust net $1.75 
 
 COOPER: Pathological Inebriety. Its Causation and 
 Treatment. By J. W. Astley Cooper. Medical Superintend- 
 ent and Licensee of Ghyllwood Sanatorium. With Introduc- 
 tion by Sir David Ferrier, m.d., f.r.s. 
 12mo. Cloth, xvi+151 pages net $1.75 
 
 COOPER: The Sexual Disabilities of Man, and Their 
 Treatment. By Arthur Cooper. Consulting Surgeon to the 
 Westminster General Dispensary, London. 3rd Edition. 
 12mo. Cloth, viii+227 pages net $2.50 
 
 COPESTAKE: The Theory and Practice of Massage. By 
 Beatrice M. Goodall-Copestake, Examiner to the Incorpor- 
 ated Society of Trained Masseuses ; Teacher of Massage and 
 Swedish Remedial Exercises to the Nursing Staff of the Lon- 
 don Hospital. 
 8vo. Cloth, 284 pages, Illust net $3.00 
 
 CORBETT-SMITH: The Problem of the Nations. A Study 
 in the Causes, Symptoms and Effects of Sexual Disease, and 
 the Education of the Individual Therein. By A. Corbett- 
 Smith, Editor of The Journal of State Medicine; Lecturer 
 in Public Health Law at the Royal Institute of Public Health. 
 Large 8vo. Cloth, xii+107 pages net $1.00 
 
 CORNET: Acute General Miliary Tuberculosis. By Prof. 
 Dr. G. Cornet, Berlin. Transl. by F. S. Tinker, b.a., m.b. 
 8vo. Cloth, viii+107 pages net $1.75 
 
 CROOKSHANK: Flatulence and Shock. By F. G. Crook- 
 SHANK, M.D., Lond., M.R.c.p. Physician (Out Patients) Hamp- 
 stead General and N. W. Lond. Hospital. 
 8vo. Cloth, iv-|-47 pages net $1.00 
 
 DAVIDSON: Localization by X-Rays and Stereoscopy. 
 By Sir James Mackenzie Davidson, m.b., cm., Aberd. Con- 
 sulting Medical Officer, Roentgen Ray Department, Royal 
 London Ophthalmic Hospital. 
 8vo. Cloth, 72 pages, PI. and 58 Stereo. Figures net $3.00 
 
 DAWSON: The Causation of Sex in Man. By E. Rumley 
 Dawson, l.r.c.p. Lond., m.r.c.s. England. 
 8vo. Cloth, 240 pages, with 21 Illust net $3.00
 
 HOEBER'S MEDICAL MONOGRAPHS 5 
 
 DUMAS AND CARREL: Technic of the Irrigation Treat- 
 ment of Wounds by the Carrel Method. (See Carrel ^and 
 Dumas.) 
 
 ED RIDGE-GREEN: The Hunterian Lectures on Coloiw- 
 Vision and Colour Blindness. Delivered before the Royal 
 College of Surgeons of England on February 1st and 3rd, 
 1911. By Professor F. W. Edridge-Green, m.d., f.r,c.s. 
 8vo. Cloth, x+76 pages net $1.75 
 
 EHRLICH: Experimental Researches on Specific Thera- 
 peutics. By Prof. Paul Ehrlich, m.d., d.sc. Oxon. The 
 Harben Lectures for 1907 of Royal Institute of Public Hfalth. 
 16mo. Cloth, x+95 pages net $1.00 
 
 EINHORN: Lectures on Dietetics. By Max Einhorn, Pro- 
 fessor of Medicine at N. Y. Post-Graduate Med. School 
 and Hospital, Visit. Phys. German Hospital, N. Y. 
 12mo. Cloth, xvi+156 pages net $125 
 
 ELLIOT: Glaucoma. By Col. Robert Henry Elliot, m.d., 
 
 F R C S 
 
 8vo. Cloth, 60 pages, with 23 lUust net $1.50 
 
 ELLIOT: Glaucoma. A Text Book for the Student of Oph- 
 thalmology. By Col. Robert Henry Elliot, m.d., f.r.c.s. 
 8vo. Cloth, 546 pages, 156 Illust net $7.50 
 
 ELLIOT: The Indian Operation of Couching for Cata- 
 ract. Incorporating the Hunterian Lectures delivered before 
 the Royal College of Surgeons of England on February 19 
 and 21, 1917. By Robert Henry Elliot, m.d., b.s., Lond., 
 sc.D., Edin., f.r.c.s., Eng., etc. 
 Bvo. Cloth, 94 pages, 45 Illust net $3.50 
 
 ELLIOT: Sclero-Comeal Trephining in the Operative 
 Treatment of Glaucoma. By Robert Henry Elliot, m.d., 
 b.s. Lond., d.sc. Edin., f.r.c.s. Eng. Lieut. Colonel i.m.s. 2d 
 Edition. 
 8vo. Cloth, 135 pages, 33 Illust net $3.00 
 
 EMERY: Immunity and Specific Therapy. By Wm. D'Este 
 Emery, m.d., b.sc. Lond. Clinical Pathologist to King's Col- 
 lege Hospital and Pathologist to the Children's Hospital. 
 Adopted by the U. S. Army. 
 8vo. Cloth, 448 pages, with 2 Illust net $3.50 
 
 EMERY: Tumors, Their Nature and Causation. By Wm. 
 D'Este Emery, m.d., b.sc, Lond. Director of Laboratories, 
 King's College Hospital, Captain r.a.m.c (T. F.). 
 12mo. Cloth, 146 pages net $1.75 
 
 FAILLA, JANEWAY AND BARRINGER: Radium Ther- 
 apy in Cancer at the Memorial Hospital. (See Janeway, 
 Barringer and Failla.) 
 
 FISHBERG: The Internal Secretions. (See Gley.)
 
 6 HOEBER'S MEDICAL MOHOGRAPHS 
 
 FRIESNER AND BRAUN: CerebeUar Abscess; Its Eti- 
 ology, Pathology, Diagnosis and Treatment. By Isidore Fries- 
 NER, M.D., F.A.C.S., Adjunct Professor of Otology and Assistant 
 Aural Surgeon, Manhattan Eye, Ear and Throat Hospital and 
 Post-Graduate Medical School, and Alfred Braun, m.d., f.a.c.s., 
 Assistant Aural Surgeon, Manhattan Eye, Ear and Throat 
 Hospital, Adjunct Professor of Laryngology, New York Poly- 
 clinic Hospital and Medical School and Adjunct Otologist, Mt. 
 Sinai Hospital. 
 8vo. Cloth, 186 pages, 10 pi., 16 Illust net $3.00 
 
 GERSTER: Recollections of a New York Surgeon. By 
 
 Arpad G. Gerster, m.d. 
 
 8vo. Cloth, 347 pages, 18 Illust net $3.50 
 
 GHON: The Primary Lung Focus of Tuberculosis in Chil- 
 dren. By Anton Ghon, m.d., English Translation by D. 
 Barty King, M.A., M.D. Edin., M.C.R.P. 
 Large 8vo. Cloth, 196 pages, 72 Illust., 2 pi net $3.75 
 
 GILES : Anatomy and Physiology of the Female Generative 
 * Organs and of Preg^nancy. By jArthur E. Giles, m.d., 
 
 B.sc. Lond., M.R.C.P. Lond. ; f.r.c.s. Ed. Gynecologist to the 
 
 Prince of Wales General Hospital. 
 
 Large 8vo. 24 pages, with Mannikin net $2.00 
 
 GLEY: The Internal Secretions. By K Gley, m.d. Mem- 
 ber of the Academy of Medicine of Paris, Professor of 
 Physiology in the College of France, etc. Authorized Trans- 
 lation. Translated and Edited by Maurice Fishberg, m.d. 
 8vo. Cloth 241 pages net $2.50 
 
 GREEFF: Guide to the Microscopic Examination of the 
 Eye. By Professor R. Greeff. Director of the University 
 Ophthalmic Clinique in the Royal Charity Hospital, Berlin. 
 With the co-operation of Professor Stock and Professor Win- 
 tersteiner. Translated from the third German Edition by 
 Hugh Walker, m.d., m.b., cm. 
 Large 8vo. Qoth, 86 pages, Illust net $2.00 
 
 GREEN, ED RIDGE-: The Hunterian Lectures on Colour 
 Vision and Colour Blindness. (See Edridge-Green.) 
 
 HARRIS: Lectures on Medical Electricity to Nurses. An 
 Illustrated Manual by J. Delpratt Harris, m.d., m.r.c.s. 
 12mo. Cloth, 88 pages, Illust net $1.00 
 
 HELLMAN: Amnesia and Analgesia in Parturition ^Twi- 
 light Sleep. By Alfred M. Hellman, b.a., m.d., f.a.c.s. 
 8vo. Cloth, with charts, 200 pages net $1.50 
 
 HEW ATT: The Examination of the Urine, and Other 
 Qinical Side Room Methods. By Andrew Fergus Hewatt, 
 I.I.B., CH.B., m.r,c.p. Edin. 
 16mo. 5th Edition, numerous Illust net $1.00
 
 HOEBER'S MEDICAL MONOGRAPHS 7 
 
 HOFMANN-GARSON: Remedial Gymnastics for Heart 
 Affections. Used at Bad-Nauheim. Being a Translation 
 of "Die Gymnastik der Herzleidenden" von Dr. Med. Julius 
 Hofmann und Dr. Med. Ludwig Pohlman. Berlin and Bad- 
 Nauheim. By John George Garson, m.d. Edin., etc. Physi- 
 cian to the Sanatoria and Bad-Nauheim, Eversley, Hants. 
 Large 8vo. Cloth, 144 pages, 51 full-page Illust net $2.50 
 
 HOWARD: The Therapeutic Value of the Potato. By 
 Heaton C. Howard, l.r.c.p. Lx)nd., m.r.c.s. Eng. 
 8vo. Paper, vi-|-31 pages, Illust net 50c 
 
 JANE WAY, BARRINGER AND FAILLA: Radium Ther- 
 apy in Cancer at the Memorial Hospital, Report of 1915- 
 1916. By Henry H. Janeway, m.d., with the Discussion of the 
 Treatment of Cancer of the Prostate and Bladder by Ben- 
 jamin S. Barringer, m.d., and an Introduction upon the Physics 
 of Radium by G. Failla. 
 8vo. Cloth, 242 pages, 16 Illust net $2.25 
 
 JELLETT: A Short Practice of Midwifery for Nurses. 
 Embodying the treatment adopted in the Rotunda Hospital, 
 Dublin. By Henry Jellett, b.a., m.d. (Dublin University), 
 F.R.C.P.I., Master Rotunda Hospital. With Six Plates and 169 
 Illustrations in the Text, also an Appendix, a Glossary of 
 Medical Terms, and the Regulations of the Central Midwives 
 Board. 
 12mo. Cloth, xvi-f508 pages net $2.50 
 
 JONES: Notes on Military Orthopaedics. By Col. Robert 
 Jones, c.b., Inspector of Military Orthopaedics, Army Medical 
 Service. 
 8vo. Cloth, 132 pages, 95 Illust net $1.75 
 
 KENWOOD: Public Health Laboratory Work. By Henry 
 R. Kenwood, m.b., f.r.s. Edin., p.p.h., f.c.s., Chadwick Profes- 
 sor of Hygiene and Public Health, University of London. 6th 
 Edition. 
 8vo. Cloth, 418 pages, Illust net $4.00 
 
 KERLEY: What Every Mother Should Know About Her 
 Infants and Young Children. By Charles Gilmore Kerley, 
 M.D. Professor of Diseases of Children, N. Y. Polyclinic Med- 
 ical School and Hospital. 
 8vo. Paper, 107 pages net 35c 
 
 KETTLE: The Pathology of Tumors. By E. H. Kettle, 
 M.D., B.S., Assistant Pathologist, St. Mary's Hospital, and As- 
 sistant Lecturer on Pathology, St. Mary's Hospital. 
 8vo. Goth, 242 pages, 126 Illust net $3.00 
 
 LAMBERT: A Terminology of Disease. To facilitate the 
 Classification of Histories in Hospitals. By Adrian V. G. 
 Lambert, m.d., Associate Professor of Surgery, Columbia Uni- 
 versity ; Director Surgical Research Service, Presbyterian Hos- 
 pital, N. Y. 
 12mo. Cloth, 176 pages net $225
 
 8 HOEBEKS MEDICAL MONOGRAPHS 
 
 LEWERS: A Practical Textbook of the Diseases of 
 Women. By Arthur H. N. Lewers, m.d. Lend. Senior 
 Obstetric Physician, London Hospital. 
 
 With 258 Illustrations, 13 Colored Plates, 5 Plates in Black 
 and White. 7th Edition. 
 8vo. Cloth, xii+S40 pages net $4.00 
 
 LEWIS: Clinical Disorders of the Heart Beat. A Hand- 
 book for Practitioners and Students. By Thomas Lewis, 
 M.D., D.sc, F.R.c.p. Assistant Physician and Lecturer in Car- 
 diac Pathology, University College Hospital Medical School. 
 4th Edition. 
 8vo. Cloth, 120 pages, 54 Illust net $2.50 
 
 LEWIS: Lectures on the Heart, Comprising the Herter 
 Lectures (Baltimore), a Harvey Lecture (New York), and 
 an Address to the Faculty of Aledicine at McGill University 
 (Montreal). By Thomas Lewis. 
 124 pages, with 83 Illust net $2.50 
 
 LEWIS: Clinical Electrocardiography. By Thomas Lewis. 
 8vo. Qoth, 2nd Edition, 120 pages, with charts net $2.50 
 
 LEWIS: The Mechanism of the Heart Beat. With Special 
 Reference to Its Clinical Pathology. By Thomas Lewis. 
 Large 8vo. Qoth, 295 pages, 227 Illust. New Edition in prep- 
 aration. 
 
 LEWIS: The Soldier's Heart and the Effort Syndrome. By 
 Thomas Lewis. 
 8vo. Cloth, 156 pages net $2.50 
 
 McCLURE: A Handbook of Fevers. By J. Campbell Mc- 
 Clure, m.d., Glasgow. Physician to Out-Patients, The French 
 Hospital, and Physician to the Margaret Street Hospital for 
 Consumption and Diseases of the Chest, London. 
 8vo. Cloth, 470 pages, with charts net $3.50 
 
 McCRUDDEN: The Chemistry, Physiology and Pathol- 
 ogy of Uric Acid, and the Physiologically Important Purin 
 Bodies. With a Discussion of the Metabolism in Gout. By 
 Francis H. McCrudden. 
 12mo. Paper, 318 pages net $2,00 
 
 McKISACK: Systematic Case Taking. A Practical Guide 
 to the Examination and Recording of Medical Cases. By 
 Henry Lawrence McKisack, m.d., m.r.c.p. Lond. 
 12mo. Cloth, 166 pages net $1.75 
 
 MACKENZIE: Symptoms and Their Interpretation, By 
 
 James Mackenzie, m.d., ll.d. Aber. and Edin. Third Edition. 
 
 8vo. Cloth, Illust. xxii+318 pages net $4.00 
 
 MACKENZIE: The Action of Muscles. By Willlam Colin 
 Mackenzie, m.d., f.r.c.s., f.r.s. (Edin.) 
 8vo. Cloth, 267 pages, 99 Illust. New Edition in preparation.
 
 HOEBER'S MEDICAL MOHOGRAPHS 9 
 
 MACMICHAEL: The Gold-Headed Cane. By William 
 Macmichael. Reprinted from the 2nd Edition. With a Pref- 
 ace by Sir William Osier and an Introduction by Dr. Fran- 
 cis R. Packard. Printed from large Scotch type on a special 
 heavy-weight paper, 5J4 by 7^ inches, bound in blue Italian 
 handmade paper, with parchment back, gilt top, square back, 
 and gold stamping on back and side net $3.00 
 
 MAGILL: Notes on Galvanism and Faradism. By E. M. 
 Magill, M.B., B.S. Lond., r.c.s.i. (Hons.) 2nd Edition. 
 12mo. Cloth, xvi+224 pages, 67 Illust net $2.00 
 
 MANUAL: See United States Army X-Ray Manual. 
 
 MARTINDALE and WESTCOTT: ."Salvarsan" "606" 
 Dioxy-Diatnino-Arsenobenzol), Its Chemistry, Pharmacy 
 and Therapeutics. By W. Harrison Martindale, ph.d. Mar- 
 burg, F.C.S., and W. Wynn Wescott, m.b. 
 8vo. Cloth, xvi+76 pages net $1.50 
 
 MINETT: Diagnosis of Bacteria and Blood Parasites. By 
 
 E. P. MiNETT, M.D., D.P.H., D.T.M. and H., M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P. 
 
 12mo. Cloth, viii+80 pages tiet $1.00 
 
 MITCHELL: Memoranda on Army General Hospital Ad- 
 ministration. By Various Authors. Edited by Peter Mit- 
 chell, M.D. Aberd., Lieut.-Colonel R.A.M.C. (T. F.), Officer 
 Commanding No. 43 General Hospital. 
 
 8vo. Qoth, v+109 pages, Illust. with vii pi net $2.25 
 
 MOTT: Nature and Nurture in Mental Development. By 
 
 F. W. MoTT, M.D., F.R.S., F.R.C.P. Pathologist to the London 
 County Asylums. 
 
 12mo. Cloth, 151 pages, with diagrams net $1.75 
 
 MUNSON: Hygiene of Communicable Diseases. By Lieut. 
 Francis M. Munson, U. S. N., Retired. Lecturer on Hygiene 
 and Instructor in Military Surgery, School of Medicine, 
 Georgetown University; Late Brigade Surgeon, 2d Provisional 
 Brigade, U. S. Marines. Published with the approval of the 
 Bureau of Medicine and Surgery of the Navy Department, and 
 by permission of the Secretary of the Navy. 
 
 12mo. Flexible cloth, 800 pages, Illust In Press 
 
 MURRELL: What to Do in Cases of Poisoning. By Wil- 
 liam Murrell, M.D., F.R.C.P. Senior Physician to the West- 
 minster Hospital. 11th Edition. 
 
 16mo. Cloth, 283 pages ttet $1.00 
 
 NEUROLOGICAL BULLETIN. Qinical Studies of Nerv- 
 ous and Mental Diseases in the Neurological Department of 
 Columbia University. Edited by Frederick Tilney, m.d., ph.d. ; 
 Associate Editor, Louis Casamajor, m.d.; Editorial Board; S. 
 P. Goodhart, m.d., F. M. Hallock, m.d., Randal Hoyt, m.d., C. 
 A. McKendree, m.d., Michael Osnato, m.d., Oliver S. Strong, 
 PH.D., I. S. Wechsler, m.d. Published monthly. 
 Vol. I, 1918, $3.00; Vol. II, 1919. Yearly subscription net $5.00
 
 lo HOEBER'S MEDICAL MONOGRAPHS 
 
 OLIVER: Lead Poisoning: From the Industrial, Medical 
 and Social Point of View. Lectures Delivered at Royal In- 
 stitute of Public Health. By Sir Thomas Oliver, m.a., m.d., 
 
 F.R.C.P. 
 
 12mo. Cloth, 294 pages net $2.25 
 
 OLIVER: Studies in Blood Pressure, Physiological and 
 Clinical. By George Oliver, m.d., Lond., f.r.c.p. Edited by 
 W. A. Halliburton, m.d., f.r.s. 
 8vo. Cloth, xxiv, 240 pages, Illust net $3.00 
 
 OSLER: Two Essays. By Sir William Osler, m.d., Regius 
 Professor of Medicine at Oxford. 
 
 Vol 1. A Way of Life. An Address to Yale Students, 
 Sunday Evening, April 20th, 1913. 
 
 16mo. Cloth, 61 pages net 75c 
 
 Vol. 2. Man's Redemption of Man. A Lay Sermon, Mc- 
 Ewan Hall, Edinburgh, Sunday, July 2d, 1910. 
 16mo. Cloth, 63 pages net 75c 
 
 OSLER ANNIVERSARY VOLUME: See Contributions 
 to Medical and Biological Research. 
 
 OSNATO: Aphasia and Associated Speech Problems. By 
 Michael Osnato, m.d., Associate in Neurology, Columbia 
 University ; Consulting Physician Manhattan State Hospital 
 and Central Islip State Hospital ; Assistant Chief of Clinic, 
 Vanderbilt Clinic, Department of Neurology. 
 12mo. Cloth, 200 pages, Illust net $2.50 
 
 OTT: Fever, Its Thermotaxis and Metabolism. By Isaac 
 Ott, a.m., m.b. 
 12mo. Cloth, 168 pages, Illust net $1.50 
 
 OWEN: The Legislative and Administrative History of 
 the Medical Department of the United States Army Dur- 
 ing the Revolutionary Period (1776-85). By Col. William 
 O. Owen, U. S. A., Curator Army Medical Museum, Wash- 
 ington, D. C. 
 12mo. Cloth, 226 pages, Illust 
 
 PAGET: For and Against Experiments on Animals. Evi- 
 dence before the Royal Commission of Vivisection. By 
 Stephen Paget, f.r.c.s. With an Introduction by The Right 
 Hon. The Earl of Cromer. 
 8vo. Cloth, xii+344 pages, Illust net $1.75 
 
 PATON: Education in War and Peace. By Stewart Paton, 
 M.D., Lecturer in Neurobiology, Princeton University, Lecturer 
 Psychiatry, Columbia University. 
 12mo. Boards, 125 pages In Press 
 
 PEGLER: Map Scheme of the Sensory Distribution of 
 the Fifth Nerve (Trigeminus) with Its Ganglia and Con- 
 nections. By L. Hemington Pegler, m.d., m.r.c.s. Senior 
 Surgeon, Metropolitan Ear, Nose and Throat Hospital, etc. 
 Folded in Cloth Binder net $10.00
 
 HOEBEKS MEDICAL MONOGRAPHS n 
 
 PICKERILL: The Prevention of Dental Caries and Oral 
 Sepsis. By H. P. Pickeriix, m.d., ch.b.m.d.s., l.d.s., Professor 
 of Dentistry and Director of the Dental School in the Univer- 
 sity of Otago. Second Edition, 1919. 
 8vo. Cloth, xvi+374 pages, Illust net $5.00 
 
 RAWLING: Landmarks and Surface Markings of the Hu- 
 man Body. By L. Bathe Rawling, m.b., b.c, f.r.c.s. 5th 
 Edition. 
 8vo. Cloth, 31 pi., xii+96 pages of text net $2.50 
 
 RITCHIE: Auricular Flutter. By William Thomas Ritchie, 
 M.D., F.R.C.P.E., F.R.s.E. Physician to the Royal Infirmary. 
 Large 8vo. Qoth, 156 pages, 21 pi. 107 Illust net $3.50 
 
 ROCKWELL: Rambling Recollections. An autobiography 
 by A. D. Rockwell, m.d. 
 Svo. Cloth, 332 pages, 7 Illust net $4.00 
 
 RUTHERFORD: The Ileo-Caecal Valve. By A. H. Ru- 
 therford, m.d. Edin. 
 Svo. Cloth, 63 pages of text, 23 full page pi. 3 colored net $2.50 
 
 SAALFELD: Lectures on Cosmetic Treatment. A Manual 
 for Practitioners. By Dr. Edmund Saalfeld of Berlin. 
 Translated by J. F. Dally, m.a., m.d., b.c. Cantab., m.r.c.p. 
 Lond. With an Introduction and Notes by P. S. Abraham, 
 
 M.A., M.D., B.SC, F.R.C.S.I. 
 
 12mo. Cloth, xii+186 pages, Illust net $1.75 
 
 SCHOOL OF SALERNUM, THE. Including Regimen Sani- 
 tatis Salemitatum, and Sir John Harrington's English Ver- 
 sion, with an Introduction by Francis R. Packard, m.d., and 
 a Note on the Prehistory of the Regimen Sanitatis by Field- 
 ing H. Garrison, m.d. 
 
 IllusL In Press. 
 
 SCOTT: Modem Medicine and Some Modem Remedies. 
 By Thomas Bodley Scott, with a Preface by Sir Lauder 
 Brunton. 2nd Edition. 
 12mo. Cloth, xv-l-198 pages net $2.00 
 
 SCOTT: The Road to a Healthy Old Age. Essays by 
 Thomas Bodley Scott, m.d. 
 12mo. Qoth, 104 pages net $1.00 
 
 SENATOR and KAMINER: Marriage and Disease. Being 
 an Abridged Edition of "Health and Disease in Relation to 
 Marriage and the Married State." By Prof. H. Senator and 
 Dr. S. Kaminer. Trans, from the German by J. Dulberg, 
 
 M.D. 
 
 Svo. Qoth, 452 pages net $2.50 
 
 SLOAN: Electro-Therapy in Gr3mecology. By Samuel 
 Sloan, m.d., f.r.f.p.s.g.. Consulting Physician to the Glasgow 
 Royal Maternity and Women's Hospital, etc. 
 Svo. Qoth, 320 pages, 39 Illust net $4.00
 
 12 HOEBER'S MEDICAL MONOGRAPHS 
 
 SMITH: Studies in the Anatomy and Sxorgery af the Nose 
 and Ear. By Adam E. Smith, m.d., Past Chief Medical and 
 Sanitary Officer, Nile Reservoir Works, Assuan, Egypt; Past 
 Instructor in Operative Surgery, College of Fliysicians and 
 Surgeons, and Past Attending Surgeon, German Hospital, 
 O.P.D., New York. 
 Large 8vo. Cloth, 168 pages, 45 pi tvet $4.00 
 
 SMITH : Some Common Remedies, and Their Use in Prac- 
 tice. By Eustace Smith, m.d. 
 12mo. Cloth, viii+112 pages net $125 
 
 SQUIER and BUGBEE: Manual of Cystoscopy. By J. 
 
 Bentley Squier, m.d. Professor of Genito-Urinary Surgery, 
 New York Post-Graduate Medical School and Hospital, and 
 Henry G. Bugbee, m.d. Adopted by the U. S. Army. 
 8vo. Flex. Leather, xiv-j-117 pages, 26 colored pi... net $3.00 
 
 STARK: The Growth and Development of the Baby. A 
 
 tabular chart, giving the result of personal observation, veri- 
 fied by authoritative data, as to development, weight, height, 
 etc., during the first seven years. By Morris Stark, m.a., b.s., 
 M.D. Instructor of Pediatrics, N. Y. Post-Graduate Med. Sch. 
 Heavy Paper, 20 by 25 inches net SOc 
 
 STEPHENSON: Eye-Strain in Every-day Practice. By 
 
 Sidney Stephenson, m.b., cm. Edin., d.o. Oxon., f.r.c.s. Edin. 
 
 Editor of the Ophthalmoscope. 
 
 8vo. Qoth, x+139 pages net $1.75 
 
 STEWART: Physical Reconstruction and Orthopedics. By 
 Harry Eaton Stewart, m.d.. Captain Medical Corps., U. S. A., 
 Division of Orthopedics ; Instructor in Medical and Ortho- 
 pedic Gymnastics and Massage, New Haven Normal School 
 of Gymnastics ; Attending Surgeon, New Haven Orthopedic 
 Dispensary. Authorized for Publication by the Surgeon-Gen- 
 eral, U. S. A. 
 8vo. Cloth, 250 pages, with 67 original Illust $3.75 
 
 SWIETOCHOWSKI: Mechano-Therapeutics in General 
 Practice. By G. de Swietochowski, m.d., m.r.c.s. Fellow of 
 the Royal Society of Medicine; Clinical Assistant, Electrical 
 and Massage Department, King's College Hosp. 
 12mo. Cloth, xiv-1-141 pages, 31 Illust net $1.75 
 
 TOUSEY: Roentgenographic Diagnosis of Dental Infec- 
 tion in Systemic Diseases. By Sinclair Tousey, a. m., m.d. 
 8vo. Cloth, 75 pages and 64 Illust net $1.50 
 
 Transactions of the Twenty-Third Annual Meeting of the 
 American Laryngological, Rhinological and Otological So- 
 ciety, 1917. Paul B. Hoeber, distributor. 
 
 1918. 8vo. Qoth, vii-f363 pages, with Illust net $3.50 
 
 1919. 8vo. Qoth, vii+436 pages, 46 Illust net ^4.00
 
 HOEBER'S MEDICAL MOKOGRAPHS 13 
 
 TRUESDELL: Birth Fractures and Epiphyseal Disloca- 
 tions. By Edward D. Truesdell, m.d., Assistant Attending 
 Surgeon and Roentgenologist, Lying-in Hospital, Associate 
 Surgeon, St. Mary's Free Hospital for Children, New York. 
 Large 8vo. Qoth, 135 pages, 151 Illust net $4.00 
 
 TURNER and PORTER: The Skiagraphy of the Accessory 
 Nasal Sinuses. By A. Logan Turner, m.d., f.r.c.s.e., f.r.s.e. 
 Surgeon to the Ear and Throat Department, the Royal In- 
 firmary, Edinburgh, and W. G. Porter, m.b., b.sc., f.r.c.s.e. 
 Surgeon to Eye and Throat Infirmary, Edinburgh. 
 Quarto, Cloth, 45 pages of text, 39 pi net $6.00 
 
 UNITED STATES ARMY X-RAY MANUAL: Author- 
 ized by the Surgeon General of the Army. Prepared under 
 the Direction of the Division of Roentgenology. 
 12mo. Flexible Leatherette, 506 pages, 219 Illust net $4.50 
 
 von RUCK and von RUCK: Studies in Immunization 
 against Tuberculosis. By Karl von Ruck, m.d., and Silvio 
 VON Ruck, m.d. 
 8vo. Qoth, xvi+439 pages net $4.00 
 
 WANKLYN: How to Diagnose Smallpox. A Guide for 
 General Practitioners, Post-Graduate Students, and Others. 
 By W. McC. Wanklyn, b.a. Cantab., M.R.C.S., l.r.c.p., d.p.h... 
 8vo. Qoth, 102 pages, Illust net $1.50 
 
 WATSON: Gonorrhoea and Its Complications in the Male 
 and Female. By David Watson, m.b., cm.. Surgeon, Glas- 
 gow Lock Hospital Dispensary, Surgeon for Venereal Dis- 
 eases, Glasgow Royal Infirmary, etc., etc. 
 Svo. Goth, 375 pages, 72 Illust., 12 pi. some colored.. net $4.00 
 
 WEBER: Aspects of Death and Correlated Aspects of 
 Life in Art, Epigram and Poetry. By Frederick Parkes 
 Weber, m.a., m.d., f.r.c.p., f.s.a. Third Edition. 
 Svo. Cloth, 784 pages, 144 Illust net $7.50 
 
 WHALE: Injuries to the Head and Neck. By H. Lawson 
 Whale, m.d. Camb., f.r.c.s. Eng., Capt. R. A. M. C. (T. F.), 
 formerly Capt. I. M. S. (Retired); The Queen's Hospital, 
 Sidcup ; No. 83 General Hospital ; Surgical Specialist to No. 
 53 General Hospital, B. E. F. ; Surgeon for the E^r, Throat, 
 and Nose to the London Temperance Hospital ; and to the 
 Hampstead General Hospital. With preface by Colonel Fred- 
 erick F. BuRGHARD, C.B., M.D., M.S., F.R.C.S. 
 
 Svo. Cloth, ix-l-322 pages, 105 Illust net $5.00 
 
 WHITE: The Pathology of Growth, Tumours. By Charles 
 Powell White, m.c, f.r.c.s. Director, Pilkington Cancer Re- 
 search Fund, Pathologist Christie Hospital, Special Lecturer 
 in Pathology, University of Manchester. 
 Svo. Qoth, xvi-|-235 pages, Illust net $3.50
 
 14 HOEBER'S MEDICAL MOHOCRAPHS 
 
 WHITE: Chronic Traumatic Osteomyelitis. By J. Renfrew 
 White, m.b., f.r.c.s., Formerly Resident Surgeon Officer, Royal 
 National Orthopedic Hospital, London ; Orthopedic Surgeon 
 New Zealand Forces. 
 8vo. Cloth, 160 pages, Illust net $3.00 
 
 WHITE: Occupational Affections of the Skin. A brief ac- 
 count of the trade Processes and Agents which give rise to 
 them. By P. Prosser White, m.d., Ed., m.r.c.s. Lond. Life 
 Vice-President, Senior Physician and Dermatologist, Royal 
 Albert Edward Infirmary. 
 8vo. Cloth, 165 pages net $2.50 
 
 WHITE: Thoughts of a Psychiatrist on the War and 
 After. By William A. White, m.d.. Superintendent St. Eliza- 
 beth's Flospital, Washington, D. C. ; Professor of Nervous 
 and Mental Diseases, Georgetown University. 
 12mo. Boards, 144 pages net $1.75 
 
 WICKHAM and DEGRAIS: Radium. As Employed in the 
 Treatment of Cancer, Angiomata, Keloids, Local Tuberculosis 
 and Other Affections. By Louis Wickham, m.v.o., Medecin 
 de St. Lazare; Ex-Chef de Clinique a L'Hopital St. Louis, and 
 Paul Degrais, Ex-Chef de Laboratoire a L'Hopital St. Louis. 
 8vo. Cloth, viii+111 pages, 53 Illust net $1.50 
 
 WRENCH: The Healthy Marriage. A Medical and Psycho- 
 logical Guide for Wives. By G. T. Wrench, m.d., b.s. Lond., 
 Past Assistant Master of the Rotunda Hospital, Dublin. 2nd 
 Edition. 
 8vo. Qoth, viii+300 pages net $1.75 
 
 WRIGHT: The Unexpurgated Case against Woman Suf- 
 frage. By Sm Almroth E. Wright, m.d., f.r.s. 
 8vo. Cloth, xii+188 pages net $1.25 
 
 WRIGHT: On Pharmaco-Therapy and Preventive Inocu- 
 lation. Applied to Pneumonia in the African Native, with 
 a Discourse on the Logical Methods Which Ought to Be Em- 
 ployed in the Evaluation of Therapeutic Agents. By Sir 
 Almroth E. Wright, m.d., f.r.s. 
 8vo. Cloth, 124 pages net $2.00 
 
 X-RAY MANUAL: See United States Army X-Ray Manual. 
 
 YOUNG: The Mentally Defective Child. By Meredith 
 Young, m.d., d.p.h., d.s.sc. Chief School Medical Officer, 
 Cheshire Education Committee; Lecturer in School Hygiene, 
 Victoria University of Manchester ; Certifying Medical Offi- 
 cer to Local Authority (Mental Deficiency Act), Co. Cheshire. 
 12mo. Cloth, xi+140 pages, Illust net $1.75 
 
 Complete catalogue and descriptive circulars sent on request. 
 
 4473 9 
 
 I
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 DEC 1 * I960 
 OEC 2 7 196-J 
 
 DtSCK 
 
 JUN 9 1981 
 
 Form L9-37m-3.'57 (C5424s4 ) 444 
 
 UN. ' .-ITY of CALIFORNIA 
 AT
 
 RM Stewart - 
 
 -n?0^ Phyoieal re coii 
 
 S81i struction and 
 orthopediea , 
 
 Hay 6 I95I4 
 
 rvE 
 
 
 llll.iiiiliii illiii lliii liiliiilliiiiiiiilllilllllllllll 
 
 3 1158 00690 8643 
 
 <<r 
 
 "S 
 
 ^^ OOP 066 394